Nikon Camcorder D2H User Manual

En  
The Nikon Guide to Digital Photography  
with the  
DIGITAL CAMERA  
How to Read This Manual  
First, be aware of the warnings, cautions, and notices on pages ii–vii.  
Next, read “Overview” and “Getting to Know  
the Camera” to familiarize yourself with the con-  
ventions used in this manual and the names of  
camera parts, then set up your camera as described  
in “First Steps.”  
Overview  
Getting to Know the Camera  
First Steps  
Basic Photography  
Basic Playback  
Now you are ready to take photographs and play  
them back.  
Image Quality and Size  
Sensitivity (ISO Equivalency)  
White Balance  
Image Adjustment  
Choosing a Shooting Mode  
Focus  
Once you have mastered the basics of digital  
photography, you can read these sections for  
complete information on when and how to use  
camera controls.  
Exposure  
Flash Photography  
Interval Timer Photography  
Self-Timer Mode  
Non-CPU Lenses  
Two-Button Reset  
More About Playback  
Voice Memos  
Refer to these chapters for more on thumbnail play-  
back, playback zoom, and photo information…  
…on recording and playing voice memos…  
…on camera menus and custom settings…  
…on connecting to a computer or TV…  
Menu Guide  
Connections  
…and on optional accessories, camera care, and  
troubleshooting.  
Technical Notes  
i
For Your Safety  
To prevent damage to your Nikon product or injury to yourself or to others,  
read the following safety precautions in their entirety before using this equip-  
ment. Keep these safety instructions where all those who use the product  
will read them.  
The consequences that could result from failure to observe the precautions  
listed in this section are indicated by the following symbol:  
This icon marks warnings, information that should be read before using this  
Nikon product to prevent possible injury.  
WARNINGS  
Do not look at the sun through the view-  
finder  
Do not disassemble  
Touching the products internal parts  
could result in injury. In the event of  
a malfunction, the product should be  
repaired only by a qualified technician.  
Should the product break open as the  
result of a fall or other accident, remove  
the battery and/or AC adapter and then  
take the product to a Nikon-authorized  
service center for inspection.  
Viewing the sun or other strong light  
source through the viewfinder could  
cause permanent visual impairment.  
Turn off immediately in the event of  
malfunction  
Should you notice smoke or an unusual  
smell coming from the equipment or  
from the AC adapter (available sep-  
arately), unplug the AC adapter and  
remove the battery immediately, tak-  
ing care to avoid burns. Continued  
operation could result in injury. After  
removing the battery, take the equipment  
to a Nikon-authorized service center for  
inspection.  
Observe proper precautions when han-  
dling batteries  
Batteries may leak or explode if im-  
properly handled. Observe the following  
precautions when handling batteries for  
use in this product:  
• Be sure the product is off before re-  
placing the battery. If you are using an  
AC adapter, be sure it is unplugged.  
• Use only batteries approved for use in  
this equipment.  
• Do not attempt to insert the battery  
upside down or backwards.  
• Do not short or disassemble the bat-  
tery.  
• Do not expose the battery to flame or  
to excessive heat.  
• Do not immerse in or expose to water.  
Do not use in the presence of flam-  
mable gas  
Do not use electronic equipment in the  
presence of flammable gas, as this could  
result in explosion or fire.  
Do not place strap around the neck of  
an infant or child  
Placing the camera strap around the  
neck of an infant or child could result  
in strangulation.  
ii  
• Replace the terminal cover when trans-  
porting the battery. Do not transport  
or store with metal objects such as  
necklaces or hairpins.  
• Batteries are prone to leakage when  
fully discharged. To avoid damage to  
the product, be sure to remove the bat-  
tery when no charge remains.  
• When the battery is not in use, attach  
the terminal cover and store in a cool  
place.  
• Immediately after use, or when the  
product is used on battery power for  
an extended period, the battery may  
become hot. Before removing the bat-  
tery, turn the camera off and allow the  
battery to cool.  
Removing memory cards  
Memory cards may become hot dur-  
ing use. Observe due caution when  
removing memory cards from the  
camera.  
CD-ROMs  
The CD-ROMs on which the software  
and manuals are distributed should not  
be played back on audio CD equipment.  
Playing CD-ROMs on an audio CD player  
could cause hearing loss or damage the  
equipment.  
Observe caution when using a flash  
Using a flash close to your subjects eyes  
could cause temporary visual impairment.  
Particular care should be observed if  
photographing infants, when the flash  
should be no less than one meter (39˝)  
from the subject.  
• Discontinue use immediately should you  
notice any changes in the battery, such  
as discoloration or deformation.  
When using the viewfinder  
Use appropriate cables  
When operating the diopter adjustment  
control with your eye to the viewfinder,  
care should be taken not to put your  
finger in your eye accidentally.  
When connecting cables to the input and  
output jacks, use only the cables pro-  
vided or sold by Nikon for the purpose,  
to maintain compliance with product  
regulations.  
Avoid contact with liquid crystal  
Should the monitor break, care should  
be taken to avoid injury due to broken  
glass and to prevent liquid crystal from  
the monitor touching the skin or entering  
the eyes or mouth.  
Keep out of reach of children  
Particular care should be taken to prevent  
infants from putting the battery or other  
small parts into their mouths.  
iii  
Caring for the Camera and Battery  
Do not drop  
Handle all moving parts with care  
The product may malfunction if subjected to Do not apply force to the battery-chamber,  
strong shocks or vibration.  
card-slot, or connector covers. These parts  
are especially susceptible to damage.  
Keep dry  
This product is not waterproof, and may Cleaning  
malfunction if immersed in water or exposed • When cleaning the camera body, use a  
to high levels of humidity. Rusting of the  
internal mechanism can cause irreparable  
damage.  
blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe  
gently with a soft, dry cloth. After using  
your camera at the beach or seaside, wipe  
off any sand or salt using a cloth lightly  
dampened with pure water and then dry  
your camera thoroughly. In rare instances,  
static electricity produced by a brush or  
cloth may cause the LCD displays to light  
up or darken. This does not indicate a  
malfunction, and the display will shortly  
return to normal.  
Avoid sudden changes in temperature  
Sudden changes in temperature, such as oc-  
cur when entering or leaving a heated build-  
ing on a cold day, can cause condensation  
inside the device. To prevent condensation,  
place the device in a carrying case or a plastic  
bag before exposing it to sudden changes in  
temperature.  
• When cleaning the lens and mirror, re-  
member that these elements are easily  
damaged. Dust and lint should be gently  
removed with a blower. When using an  
aerosol blower, keep the can vertical (tilt-  
ing the can could result in liquid being  
sprayed on the mirror). If you do get a  
fingerprint or other stain on the lens, ap-  
ply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft  
cloth and wipe the lens carefully.  
Keep away from strong magnetic fields  
Do not use or store this device in the vicinity  
of equipment that generates strong elec-  
tromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields.  
Strong static charges or the magnetic fields  
produced by equipment such as radio trans-  
mitters could interfere with the monitor,  
damage data stored on the memory card, or  
affect the products internal circuitry.  
• See Technical Notes: Caring for Your  
Camera” for information on cleaning the  
low-pass filter ( 240).  
Do not point the lens at strong light sources  
for extended periods  
Avoid pointing the lens at the sun or other  
strong light sources for extended periods Storage  
when using or storing the camera. Intense • To prevent mold or mildew, store the cam-  
light may cause deterioration in the image  
sensor, producing a white blur effect in  
photographs.  
era in a dry, well-ventilated area. If you  
will not be using the product for long pe-  
riods, remove the battery to prevent leak-  
age and store the camera in a plastic bag  
containing a desiccant. Do not, however,  
store the camera case in a plastic bag, as  
this may cause the material to deteriorate.  
Note that desiccant gradually loses its ca-  
pacity to absorb moisture and should be  
replaced at regular intervals.  
Do not touch the shutter curtain  
The shutter curtain is extremely thin and  
easily damaged. Under no circumstances  
should you exert pressure on the curtain,  
poke it with cleaning tools, or subject it to  
powerful air currents from a blower. These  
actions could scratch, deform, or tear the  
curtain.  
iv  
• Do not store the camera with naphtha or circumstances could result in loss of data or  
camphor moth balls, close to equipment in damage to product memory or internal  
that produces strong magnetic fields, or in circuitry. To prevent an accidental inter-  
areas subject to extremes of temperature, ruption of power, avoid carrying the product  
for example near a space heater or in a from one location to another while the AC  
closed vehicle on a hot day.  
adapter is connected.  
To prevent mold or mildew, take the cam-  
era out of storage at least once a month.  
Turn the camera on and release the shut-  
ter a few times before putting the camera  
away again.  
• Store the battery in a cool, dry place. Re-  
place the terminal cover before putting  
the battery away.  
Batteries  
• When you turn the device on, check the  
battery-level displayed in the control panel  
to determine whether the battery needs  
to be replaced. The battery needs to be  
replaced when the battery-level indicator  
is flashing.  
• Ready a spare battery and keep it fully  
charged when taking photographs on im-  
portant occasions. Depending on your lo-  
cation, you may find it difficult to purchase  
replacement batteries on short notice.  
Notes on the monitor  
• The monitor may contain a few pixels that  
are always lit or that do not light. This is  
a characteristic common to all TFT LCD  
monitors and does not indicate a malfunc- • On cold days, the capacity of batteries  
tion. Images recorded with the product  
will not be affected.  
• Images in the monitor may be difficult to  
see in a bright light.  
• Do not apply pressure to the monitor; this  
could cause damage or malfunction. Dust  
tends to decrease. Be sure the battery is  
fully charged before taking photographs  
outside in cold weather. Keep a spare  
battery in a warm place and exchange the  
two as necessary. Once warmed, a cold  
battery may recover some of its charge.  
or lint on the monitor can be removed • Should the battery terminals become dirty,  
with a blower. Stains can be removed  
by rubbing the surface lightly with a soft  
cloth or chamois leather.  
• Should the monitor break, care should be  
taken to avoid injury due to broken glass  
and to prevent the liquid crystal from the  
monitor touching the skin or entering the  
eyes or mouth.  
wipe them off with a clean, dry cloth be-  
fore use.  
• After removing the battery from the cam-  
era, be sure to replace the terminal cover.  
Memory cards  
Turn the power off before inserting or  
removing memory cards. Inserting or  
removing cards with the power on could  
render them unusable.  
• Insert memory cards as  
shown in the illustration  
• Replace the monitor cover when trans-  
porting the camera or leaving it unat-  
tended.  
Turn the product off before removing or dis-  
connecting the power source  
at right. Inserting cards  
upside down or back-  
Do not unplug the product or remove the  
battery while the product is on, or while  
images are being recorded or deleted. Forc-  
ibly cutting power to the product in these  
wards could damage the  
camera or the card.  
v
Notices  
• No part of the manuals included with • Nikon will not be held liable for any  
this product may be reproduced, trans-  
mitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval  
damages resulting from the use of this  
product.  
system, or translated into any language • While every effort has been made to  
in any form, by any means, without  
Nikons prior written permission.  
• Nikon reserves the right to change the  
specifications of the hardware and soft-  
ware described in these manuals at any  
time and without prior notice.  
ensure that the information in these  
manuals is accurate and complete, we  
would appreciate it were you to bring  
any errors or omissions to the attention  
of the Nikon representative in your area  
(address provided separately).  
Notice for customers in the U.S.A.  
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) Radio Frequency Interference Statement  
This equipment has been tested and found  
to comply with the limits for a Class B digi-  
tal device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC  
rules. These limits are designed to provide  
D2H  
Tested To Comply  
With FCC Standards  
FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE  
reasonable protection against harmful  
interference in a residential installation.  
This equipment generates, uses, and can  
radiate radio frequency energy and, if not  
installed and used in accordance with the  
instructions, may cause harmful interfer-  
ence to radio communications. However,  
there is no guarantee that interference  
will not occur in a particular installation.  
If this equipment does cause harmful in-  
terference to radio or television reception,  
which can be determined by turning the  
equipment off and on, the user is encour-  
aged to try to correct the interference by  
one or more of the following measures:  
CAUTIONS  
Modifications  
The FCC requires the user to be notified  
that any changes or modifications made to  
this device that are not expressly approved  
by Nikon Corporation may void the users  
authority to operate the equipment.  
Interface Cables  
Use the interface cables sold or provided  
by Nikon for your equipment. Using other  
interface cables may exceed the limits of  
Class B Part 15 of the FCC rules.  
Notice for customers in the State of California  
WARNING: Handling the cord on this  
product will expose you to lead, a chemical  
known to the State of California to cause  
birth defects or other reproductive harm.  
Wash hands after handling.  
Reorient or relocate the receiving an-  
tenna.  
• Increase the separation between the  
equipment and receiver.  
• Connect the equipment into an outlet  
on a circuit different from that to which  
the receiver is connected.  
Nikon Inc.,  
1300 Walt Whitman Road, Melville, New York  
11747-3064, U.S.A. Tel.: 631-547-4200  
• Consult the dealer or an experienced  
radio/television technician for help.  
vi  
Notice for customers in Canada  
CAUTION  
ATTENTION  
This class B digital apparatus meets all re- Cet appareil numérique de la classe B res-  
quirements of the Canadian Interference pecte toutes les exigences du Règlement  
Causing Equipment Regulations.  
sur le matériel brouilleur du Canada.  
Notice Concerning Prohibition of Copying or Reproduction  
Note that simply being in possession of material that has been digitally copied or reproduced  
by means of a scanner, digital camera or other device may be punishable by law.  
• Items prohibited by law from being • Cautions on certain copies and re-  
copied or reproduced  
productions  
Do not copy or reproduce paper money,  
coins, securities, government bonds, or  
local government bonds, even if such  
copies or reproductions are stamped  
“Sample.”  
The government has issued cautions on  
copies or reproductions of securities is-  
sued by private companies (shares, bills,  
checks, gift certificates, etc.), commuter  
passes, or coupon tickets, except when  
a minimum of necessary copies are to be  
provided for business use by a company.  
Also, do not copy or reproduce pass-  
ports issued by the government, licenses  
issued by public agencies and private  
groups, ID cards, and tickets, such as  
passes and meal coupons.  
The copying or reproduction of paper  
money, coins, or securities which are  
circulated in a foreign country is pro-  
hibited.  
Unless the prior permission of the  
government has been obtained, the  
copying or reproduction of unused post-  
age stamps or post cards issued by the  
government is prohibited.  
• Comply with copyright notices  
The copying or reproduction of copy-  
righted creative works such as books,  
music, paintings, woodcut prints, maps,  
drawings, movies, and photographs is  
governed by national and international  
copyright laws. Do not use this product  
for the purpose of making illegal copies  
or to infringe copyright laws.  
The copying or reproduction of stamps  
issued by the government and of cer-  
tified documents stipulated by law is  
prohibited.  
Trademark Information  
Apple, the Apple logo, Macintosh, Mac OS, Power Macintosh, and PowerBook are registered trademarks of Apple  
Computer, Inc. Power Mac, iMac, and iBook are trademarks of Apple Computer, Inc. Microsoft and Windows are  
registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation. Pentium is a trademark of Intel Corporation. CompactFlash is a  
trademark of SanDisk Corporation. Microdrive is a registered trademark of Hitachi Global Storage Technologies in  
the United States and/or other countries. Lexar Media is a trademark of Lexar Media Corporation. All other trade  
names mentioned in this manual or the other documentation provided with your Nikon product are trademarks or  
registered trademarks of their respective holders.  
vii  
Table of Contents  
For Your Safety................................................................................................. ii  
Caring for the Camera and Battery ................................................................ iv  
Notices.............................................................................................................. vi  
Introduction.......................................................................................................  
Overview ..........................................................................................................  
Getting to Know the Camera..........................................................................  
1
2
3
First Steps ......................................................................................................... 15  
Step 1—Attach the Camera Strap .................................................................... 16  
Step 2—Insert the Battery ................................................................................ 17  
Step 3—Choose a Language............................................................................ 18  
Step 4—Set the Time and Date........................................................................ 19  
Step 5—Attach a Lens...................................................................................... 20  
Step 6—Insert a Memory Card......................................................................... 22  
Tutorial............................................................................................................... 25  
Basic Photography ........................................................................................... 26  
Step 1—Ready the Camera .............................................................................. 27  
Step 2—Adjust Camera Settings ...................................................................... 29  
Step 3—Frame a Photograph ........................................................................... 31  
Step 4—Focus.................................................................................................. 32  
Step 5—Check Exposure.................................................................................. 33  
Step 6—Take the Photograph .......................................................................... 34  
Basic Playback .................................................................................................. 35  
Taking Photographs.......................................................................................... 37  
Using Camera Menus....................................................................................... 39  
Image Quality and Size.................................................................................... 41  
Image Quality .................................................................................................. 41  
Image Size ....................................................................................................... 44  
Sensitivity (ISO Equivalency)............................................................................ 48  
White Balance.................................................................................................. 51  
Fine-Tuning White Balance............................................................................... 54  
Choosing a Color Temperature......................................................................... 56  
Preset White Balance........................................................................................ 57  
Image Adjustment ........................................................................................... 65  
Making Edges More Distinct: Image Sharpening............................................ 65  
Adjusting Contrast: Tone Compensation........................................................ 66  
Suiting Colors to a Workflow: Color Mode ..................................................... 67  
Controlling Color: Hue Adjustment................................................................ 69  
Choosing a Shooting Mode............................................................................. 70  
Focus................................................................................................................. 72  
Focus Mode..................................................................................................... 72  
Focus Area Selection ........................................................................................ 74  
Autofocus........................................................................................................ 76  
AF Area Mode.................................................................................................. 76  
viii  
Manual Focus .................................................................................................. 83  
Exposure........................................................................................................... 84  
Metering.......................................................................................................... 84  
Exposure Mode................................................................................................ 85  
Autoexposure Lock .......................................................................................... 95  
Exposure Compensation................................................................................... 97  
Bracketing ....................................................................................................... 98  
Flash Photography........................................................................................... 106  
The Creative Lighting System ........................................................................... 106  
D-TTL Flash Control.......................................................................................... 110  
Compatible Speedlights ................................................................................... 111  
Flash Sync Modes............................................................................................. 113  
Flash Contacts and Indicators........................................................................... 117  
Interval Timer Photography ............................................................................ 118  
Self-Timer Mode............................................................................................... 123  
Non-CPU Lenses ............................................................................................... 124  
Two-Button Reset............................................................................................. 128  
More About Playback ....................................................................................... 129  
Single-Image Playback...................................................................................... 130  
Photo Information............................................................................................ 132  
Viewing Multiple Images: Thumbnail Playback.................................................. 134  
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom ............................................................... 136  
Protecting Photographs from Deletion.............................................................. 137  
Deleting Individual Photographs....................................................................... 138  
Voice Memos ..................................................................................................... 139  
Recording Voice Memos................................................................................... 140  
Voice Memo Recording Options ....................................................................... 142  
Playing Voice Memos ....................................................................................... 144  
Voice Memo Playback Options ......................................................................... 145  
Menu Guide....................................................................................................... 147  
The Playback Menu.......................................................................................... 148  
Delete.............................................................................................................. 148  
Playback Folder................................................................................................ 150  
Slide Show....................................................................................................... 151  
Hide Image ...................................................................................................... 154  
Print Set........................................................................................................... 156  
Display Mode................................................................................................... 159  
Image Review .................................................................................................. 159  
After Delete..................................................................................................... 160  
The Shooting Menu......................................................................................... 161  
Shooting Menu Bank ....................................................................................... 162  
Reset Shooting Menu....................................................................................... 164  
Active Folder.................................................................................................... 165  
ix  
File Name......................................................................................................... 166  
Image Quality .................................................................................................. 167  
Image Size ....................................................................................................... 167  
Raw Compression ............................................................................................ 167  
White Balance.................................................................................................. 167  
ISO .................................................................................................................. 168  
Image Sharpening............................................................................................ 168  
Tone Compensation......................................................................................... 168  
Color Mode ..................................................................................................... 168  
Hue Adjustment............................................................................................... 169  
Interval Timer Shooting.................................................................................... 169  
Non-CPU Lens Data ......................................................................................... 169  
Custom Settings ............................................................................................... 170  
The Setup Menu............................................................................................... 206  
Format............................................................................................................. 207  
LCD Brightness ................................................................................................ 208  
Mirror Lock-up................................................................................................. 208  
Video Mode..................................................................................................... 209  
Language......................................................................................................... 209  
Date ................................................................................................................ 209  
Image Comment.............................................................................................. 210  
Auto Image Rotation........................................................................................ 211  
Voice Memo .................................................................................................... 212  
Voice Memo Protect......................................................................................... 212  
Voice Memo Button......................................................................................... 212  
Audio Output .................................................................................................. 212  
USB ................................................................................................................. 213  
Dust Off Ref Photo........................................................................................... 214  
Battery Info...................................................................................................... 216  
Wireless LAN.................................................................................................... 217  
Firmware Version ............................................................................................. 219  
Connections....................................................................................................... 221  
Television Playback .......................................................................................... 222  
Connecting to a Computer.............................................................................. 223  
Technical Notes.................................................................................................. 227  
Optional Accessories........................................................................................ 228  
Lenses for the D2H .......................................................................................... 228  
Other Accessories............................................................................................. 231  
Caring for the Camera..................................................................................... 237  
Troubleshooting............................................................................................... 242  
Specifications ................................................................................................... 245  
Index .................................................................................................................. 250  
x
Overview  
Introduction  
2
Getting Started  
Getting to Know the  
Camera  
3–14  
First Steps  
This chapter is divided into the following sections:  
15–24  
Overview  
Read this section for a description of how this  
manual is organized and for an explanation of the  
symbols and conventions used.  
Getting to Know the Camera  
Bookmark this section and refer to it for informa-  
tion on the names and functions of camera parts.  
First Steps  
This section details the steps required to ready the  
camera for use: inserting the battery and memory  
card, attaching a lens and camera strap, and set-  
ting the date, time, and language.  
1
Overview  
About This Manual  
Thank you for your purchase of a Nikon D2H single-lens reflex (SLR) digital  
camera with interchangeable lenses. This manual has been written to help  
you enjoy taking pictures with your Nikon digital camera. Read this manual  
thoroughly before use, and keep it handy when using the product.  
To make it easier to find the information you need, the following symbols  
and conventions are used:  
This icon marks cautions, informa-  
tion that should be read before use  
to prevent damage to the camera.  
This icon marks tips, additional in-  
formation that may be helpful when  
using the camera.  
This icon marks notes, information  
that should be read before using  
the camera.  
This icon indicates that more infor-  
mation is available elsewhere in this  
manual or in the Quick Start Guide.  
This icon marks settings that can be  
fine-tuned from the Custom Set-  
tings menu.  
This icon marks settings that can be  
adjusted using camera menus.  
Take Test Shots  
Before taking pictures on important occasions (for example, at weddings or before  
taking the camera with you on a trip), take a test shot to ensure that the camera is  
functioning normally. Nikon will not be held liable for damages or lost profits that may  
result from product malfunction.  
Life-Long Learning  
As part of Nikons Life-Long Learning” commitment to ongoing product support and  
education, continually-updated information is available on-line at the following sites:  
• For users in the U.S.A.: http://www.nikonusa.com/  
• For users in Europe: http://www.europe-nikon.com/support  
• For users in Asia, Oceania, the Middle East, and Africa: http://www.nikon-asia.com/  
Visit these sites to keep up-to-date with the latest product information, tips, answers  
to frequently-asked questions (FAQs), and general advice on digital imaging and pho-  
tography. Additional information may be available from the Nikon representative in  
your area. See the URL below for contact information:  
http://nikonimaging.com/  
Replacing This Manual  
Should you lose this manual, replacements can be ordered, for a fee, from any autho-  
rized Nikon service representative.  
2
Getting to Know the Camera  
Camera Controls and Displays  
Take a few moments to familiarize yourself with camera controls and dis-  
plays. You may find it helpful to bookmark this section and refer to it as you  
read through the rest of the manual.  
Camera Body  
Metering selector:  
Metering selector  
lock button: 84  
Exposure mode (  
84  
) button:  
) button: 23  
85  
Format (  
Bracketing (  
)
button: 98, 103  
Mode dial lock  
Power switch:  
Shutter-release  
button: 32, 34  
Exposure  
compensation  
) button:  
97  
27  
release:  
70  
Mode dial:  
70  
Eyelet for  
camera  
strap:  
(
16  
Eyelet for  
camera  
strap:  
Flash sync  
mode (  
button:  
)
16  
114  
Top control  
panel:  
Diopter  
adjustment  
knob:  
6
Accessory shoe:  
117  
Command lock (  
button: 94  
)
31  
Focal plane mark  
): 83  
(
LCD Illuminators  
The control panel backlights (LCD illuminators) will light while the power switch is held  
in the position, allowing the display to be read in the dark. After the power switch  
is released, the illuminator will remain lit while the camera exposure meters are active  
or until the shutter is released.  
3
Ambient light sensor:  
51, 57  
Camera Body (continued)  
Self-timer lamp:  
123  
Flash sync terminal:  
117  
10-pin remote terminal:  
235  
Audio/video (A/V) connector  
(under cover): 222  
Housings for flash  
sync and 10-pin re-  
mote terminal caps  
(on inside of cover)  
DC-in connector  
(under cover):  
231  
USB connector (under cover):  
224  
Lens release button:  
Focus-mode selector:  
Battery cover latch:  
21  
72  
17  
Connector for  
optional WT-1/  
WT-1A wireless  
LAN adapter  
(under cover):  
217  
Depth-of-field preview button:  
85  
Sub-command dial:  
12  
FUNC. button:  
201  
Sub-command  
dial for vertical  
shooting:  
12  
Shutter-release  
button for vertical  
shooting:  
31  
Vertical shooting shutter-  
release button lock  
Tripod socket  
4
Eyepiece shutter lever:  
Delete ( ) button: 35,  
23  
31  
Viewfinder eyepiece:  
AE/AF lock (  
button: 80, 95  
31, 232  
AF-ON ( )button:  
73  
138  
Format (  
)
) button:  
)
Main command  
dial: 12  
Playback (  
button:  
130  
Multi selector:  
14  
Monitor:  
35, 237  
16,  
Focus selector  
Menu (  
button:  
)
lock:  
74  
39  
Memory card  
access lamp:  
22, 24  
Thumbnail (  
button:  
)
134  
AF-area mode  
selector: 76  
Protect (  
button:  
)
137  
Enter (  
)
button:  
40  
Memory card  
slot cover:  
22  
Playback zoom  
( ) button:  
136  
Card-slot cover  
release button  
(under cover):  
22  
Speaker:  
Rear control  
panel:  
Sensitivity (ISO)  
button: 49  
145  
8
Main command dial  
for vertical shooting:  
12  
Image quality/size  
(QUAL) button:  
AF-ON ( ) button for vertical  
shooting: 73  
Microphone ( ) button:  
43  
White balance (WB)  
button: 53  
140  
Microphone: 140  
The Speaker and Microphone  
Do not bring magnetic devices, such as microdrive cards, close to the built-in speaker  
or microphone.  
5
The Top Control Panel  
1
2
3
9
10  
4
5
6
11  
7
8
12  
13  
18  
19  
14  
15  
16  
17  
20  
21  
22  
6
1 Shutter speed ................... 85, 93, 94  
Exposure compensation value....... 97  
Number of shots in bracketing  
11 Battery indicator ........................... 27  
12 Frame count ................................. 23  
sequence...................................... 98  
Number of intervals for  
13 “K” (appears when memory remains  
for over 1000 exposures) .............. 47  
interval timer photography ......... 120  
Focal length (non-CPU lens)........ 126  
Sensitivity (ISO equivalency) .......... 49  
14 FV lock indicator......................... 108  
15 Sync indicator..................... 115, 194  
16 Clock battery indicator.......... 19, 239  
17 Exposure compensation indicator.. 97  
18 Interval timer indicator................ 120  
19 Aperture lock icon ........................ 94  
20 Image comment indicator........... 210  
2 Shutter-speed lock icon................. 94  
3 Flexible program indicator............. 87  
4 Exposure mode............................. 85  
5 Memory card indicator.................. 23  
6 Focus area .........................74, 78–79  
AF-area mode............................... 76  
21 Exposure bracketing indicator....... 99  
White-balance bracketing  
7 Flash sync mode ......................... 113  
indicator..................................... 103  
8 Number of exposures  
remaining............................... 28, 47  
22 Electronic analog exposure  
Number of shots remaining  
before memory buffer fills............. 71  
Capture mode indicator.............. 225  
display.......................................... 92  
Exposure compensation................ 97  
Bracketing progress indicator  
...................................100–102, 105  
PC mode indicator...................... 225  
9 Aperture stop indicator................. 91  
10 Aperture (f/-number) .................... 90  
Aperture (number of stops)........... 85  
Bracketing increment............ 99, 103  
Number of shots per interval....... 120  
Maximum aperture  
(non-CPU lens)............................ 127  
PC mode indicator...................... 225  
7
The Rear Control Panel  
1
2
3
8
9
10  
11  
12  
4
13  
5
6
7
8
1 Custom settings bank................. 173  
2 “Remaining” indicator............ 28, 47  
3 Shooting menu settings bank ..... 162  
6 “K” (appears when memory remains  
for over 1000 exposures) .............. 47  
Color temperature indicator.......... 56  
7 Image quality................................ 43  
4 Sensitivity (ISO) indicator............... 49  
Auto sensitivity indicator............. 183  
8 Image size .................................... 45  
9 White-balance bracketing  
indicator..................................... 103  
5 Sensitivity ..................................... 49  
Sensitivity (high gain).................... 49  
Number of exposures  
10 Voice memo recording indicator  
remaining............................... 28, 47  
Length of voice memo................ 141  
White balance fine-tuning ............ 55  
White balance preset number....... 57  
Color temperature........................ 56  
PC mode indicator...................... 225  
(shooting mode) ......................... 141  
11 Voice memo status indicator....... 141  
12 Voice memo recording mode ...... 141  
13 White balance mode..................... 51  
9
The Viewfinder Display  
1
21  
22  
2
23  
24  
25  
26  
27  
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
20  
12  
13 14  
15  
16 17 18  
19  
10  
1 8-mm (0.31˝) reference circle for  
14 “K” (appears when memory remains  
center-weighted metering............. 84  
for over 1000 exposures) .............. 47  
2 Focus brackets (focus areas).......... 74  
Spot metering targets................... 84  
15 Flash-ready indicator................... 117  
16 Battery indicator ........................... 27  
17 FV lock indicator......................... 108  
18 Sync indicator..................... 115, 194  
19 Aperture stop indicator................. 85  
3 Focus indicator ............................. 32  
4 Metering ...................................... 84  
5 Bracketing indicator.....100–102, 105  
6 Autoexposure (AE) lock................. 95  
7 Shutter-speed lock icon................. 94  
8 Shutter speed ..........................85–93  
9 Aperture lock icon ........................ 94  
20 Electronic analog exposure display  
.................................................... 92  
Exposure compensation................ 97  
21 Voice memo status indicator....... 141  
22 White-balance bracketing  
10 Aperture (f/-number) .................... 90  
indicator..................................... 103  
Aperture (number of stops)........... 95  
23 White-balance mode .................... 51  
24 Image size .................................... 45  
25 Image quality................................ 43  
11 Exposure mode............................. 85  
12 Exposure compensation indicator.. 97  
13 Frame count ................................. 23  
Number of exposures  
26 Sensitivity (ISO) indicator............... 49  
remaining............................... 28, 47  
Number of shots remaining  
before memory buffer fills............. 71  
Exposure compensation value....... 97  
PC mode indicator...................... 225  
Auto sensitivity indicator............. 183  
27 Sensitivity (ISO equivalency) .......... 49  
11  
The Command Dials  
The main- and sub-command dials are used alone or in combination with  
other controls to adjust a variety of settings. For ease of access when taking  
photographs in tall (portrait) orientation, dials that duplicate the functions  
of the main and sub-command dials have been placed close to the shutter-  
release button for vertical shooting ( 4).  
Image  
quality/size  
button  
Sub-command dial  
Bracketing  
button  
Exposure  
mode button  
Exposure  
compensation  
button  
Flash sync  
mode button  
Command  
lock button  
Sensitivity White  
button balance  
button  
Main command dial  
Image quality and size  
Set image quality ( 43).  
Choose an image size ( 45).  
White balance  
Choose a white balance setting ( 53).  
Fine-tune white balance/choose a color  
temperature/choose a white balance preset  
(
55).  
Sensitivity (ISO equivalency)  
Set sensitivity (ISO equivalency;  
49).  
12  
Exposure  
Choose the exposure mode ( 86–93).  
Choose a combination of aperture and  
shutter speed (exposure mode P;  
86).  
Choose a shutter speed (exposure mode S  
or M; 88, 92).  
Choose an aperture (exposure mode A or  
M; 90, 92).  
Set exposure compensation ( 97).  
Shutter speed lock (exposure mode S or  
M;  
94).  
Aperture lock (exposure mode A or M;  
94).  
Activate or cancel bracketing/select num-  
ber of shots in bracketing sequence (  
98, 103).  
Select bracketing exposure increment (  
99, 103).  
Flash settings  
Choose a flash sync mode for optional  
Speedlight ( 114).  
13  
The Multi Selector  
The multi selector is used for the following operations:  
Menu navigation  
Move highlight bar up ( 39).  
Shooting  
Select focus area above current focus area ( 74).  
Menu navigation  
Select highlighted item  
40).  
Full-frame playback  
Display previous image ( 132).  
(
Shooting  
Select center focus area  
Thumbnail playback  
Highlight thumbnail above current thumbnail ( 134).  
(
74).  
Menu navigation  
Playback  
Cancel and return to pre-  
Change number of im-  
vious menu ( 40).  
ages displayed ( 134).  
Shooting  
Menu navigation  
Select highlighted item or  
display sub-menu ( 39).  
Select focus area to left  
of current focus area (  
74).  
Shooting  
Full-frame playback  
Display previous page of  
photo information  
132).  
Menu navigation  
Move highlight bar down  
Select focus area to right  
of current focus area (  
74).  
(
(
39).  
Shooting  
Select focus area below  
current focus area  
74).  
Full-frame playback  
Display next page of pho-  
to information ( 132).  
Thumbnail playback  
Highlight thumbnail to  
left of current thumbnail  
(
(
134).  
Thumbnail playback  
Highlight thumbnail to  
right of current thumbnail  
Full-frame playback  
Display next image (  
132).  
(
134).  
Thumbnail playback  
Highlight  
below current thumbnail  
134).  
thumbnail  
(
The Multi Selector  
The button can also be used to select items highlighted in the camera menus. There  
may be some cases in which the operations listed on this page do not apply.  
14  
First Steps  
Getting the Camera Ready for Use  
Before using your camera for the first time, complete the following steps:  
STEP 1  
STEP 2  
Attach the Camera Strap  
Insert the Battery  
16  
17  
To learn more about batteries and alternative power sources, see:  
Technical Notes: Optional Accessories.........................  
• Caring for the Camera and Battery.............................  
231  
iv–v  
STEP 3  
STEP 4  
Choose a Language  
18  
Set the Time and Date  
19  
For information on changing the clock battery, see:  
Technical Notes: Caring for your camera.....................  
239  
STEP 5  
STEP 6  
Attach a Lens  
20–21  
To learn more about the lenses available for the D2H, see:  
Technical Notes: Optional Accessories.........................  
228–230  
22–24  
Insert a Memory Card  
To learn more about compatible memory cards, see:  
Technical Notes: Approved Memory Cards..................  
For more information on formatting memory cards, see:  
• The Setup Menu: Formatting Memory Cards ..............  
236  
207  
15  
1
Step 1—Attach the Camera Strap  
Attach the camera strap securely to the two eyelets on the camera body as  
shown below.  
The Monitor Cover  
A clear plastic cover (the BM-3 LCD monitor cover) is  
provided with the camera to keep the monitor clean,  
and to protect the monitor when the camera is not in  
A
/V  
O
U
use or when you are transporting the camera. To re-  
move the monitor cover, hold the camera firmly, take  
the cover by its edges, and pull the bottom of the cover  
T
DC  
I
N
gently outwards as shown at right ( ). Once the cover  
is unlatched, you can move it slightly away from the  
monitor and then remove it as shown ( ).  
To replace the cover for shooting or storage, insert the  
two projections on the top of the cover into the match-  
ing indentations above the camera monitor ( ), then  
press the bottom of the cover until you hear it click into  
place ( ).  
A
/V  
O
U
T
DC  
I
N
EN-EL4 Batteries ( 17)  
EN-EL4 rechargeable Li-ion batteries can provide compatible devices with information  
on battery charge state, enabling the MH-21 Quick Charger to display the current  
charge level and charge the battery appropriately. When the EN-EL4 is inserted in the  
camera, the battery charge state is shown in six levels. Detailed information on bat-  
tery charge, battery life, and the number of pictures taken since the battery was last  
charged can be viewed using the Battery info option in the setup menu ( 216).  
16  
2
Step 2—Insert the Battery  
The D2H is powered by a rechargeable Nikon EN-EL4 Li-ion battery (provided).  
.1 Charge the battery  
2
The EN-EL4 is not fully charged at shipment. To maximize shooting  
time, charge the battery in the supplied MH-21 quick charger before  
use (see the MH-21 instruction manual for details). About 100 minutes  
are required to fully recharge the battery when no charge remains.  
.2 Turn the camera off  
2
Turn the camera off before inserting or re-  
moving batteries.  
.3 Remove the battery-chamber cover  
Turn the battery-chamber cover latch to the  
open position ( ) and remove the battery-  
chamber cover.  
2
.4 Attach the battery cover to the battery  
The battery can be charged with the cover  
attached. See the instructions provided  
with the EN-EL4 for details.  
2
.5 Insert the battery  
2
Insert the battery as shown at right.  
.6 Latch the battery-chamber cover  
To prevent the battery from being dislodged  
during operation, be sure the cover is se-  
curely latched.  
2
Removing the Battery  
Before removing the battery, turn the camera off and rotate the battery-chamber cover  
latch to the open position ( ).  
Camera Off Display  
If a battery and memory card are inserted, the frame  
count and number of exposures remaining will be dis-  
played even when the camera is off (with some memory  
cards, it may be necessary to turn the camera on to view  
the frame count and number of exposures remaining).  
17  
3
Step 3—Choose a Language  
Camera menus and messages can be displayed in your choice of German,  
English, Spanish, French, Chinese, and Japanese.  
.1  
.2  
SHOOTING MENU  
Shooting menu bank  
Reset shooting menu  
Active folder  
File name  
Image quality  
Image size  
A
3
3
100  
DSC  
NORM  
Raw compression  
White bal.  
ON  
A
Turn camera on.  
Display menus (if option is highlight-  
ed, press multi selector to left until  
icon at left of menu is selected).  
.3  
.5  
.7  
.4  
SET UP  
SET UP  
Format  
Format  
3
3
3
3
LCD brightness  
Mirror lock-up  
Video mode  
Date  
LCD brightness  
Mirror lock-up  
Video mode  
Date  
0
0
OFF  
OFF  
Language  
En  
OFF  
ON  
Language  
En  
OFF  
ON  
Image comment  
Auto image rotation  
Image comment  
Auto image rotation  
Display SET UP menu.  
Position cursor in SET UP menu.  
.6  
SET UP  
SET UP  
Language  
Format  
3
LCD brightness  
Mirror lock-up  
Video mode  
Date  
0
OFF  
De Deutsch  
En English  
Es Español  
Fr Français  
OK  
Language  
En  
OFF  
ON  
简体)  
日本語  
Image comment  
Auto image rotation  
Highlight Language.  
Display options.  
.8  
SET UP  
Language  
SET UP  
Format  
3
LCD brightness  
Mirror lock-up  
Video mode  
Date  
0
OFF  
De Deutsch  
En English  
Es Español  
Fr Français  
OK  
Language  
En  
OFF  
ON  
简体)  
日本語  
Image comment  
Auto image rotation  
Highlight option.  
Return to SET UP menu.  
18  
4
Step 4—Set the Time and Date  
The time and date of recording is included with all pictures. To ensure that  
your pictures are stamped with the correct time and date, display the setup  
menu ( 18), then set the time and date as described below.  
.1  
.2  
SET UP  
SET UP  
Date  
Format  
4
4
Set  
OK  
LCD brightness  
Mirror lock-up  
Video mode  
Date  
0
OFF  
Y
M
D
2003 00 00  
Language  
En  
OFF  
ON  
H
M
S
Image comment  
Auto image rotation  
00 00 00  
Highlight Date.  
Display DATE menu.  
Edit Year, Month, Day, Hour, Minute,  
and Second. Press multi selector left  
or right to select item, up or down to  
change.  
.3  
SET UP  
Date  
4
4
Set  
OK  
Y
M
D
2003 08 30  
H
M
S
13 42 08  
The camera clock is less accurate than  
most watches and household clocks.  
Check the clock regularly against  
more accurate time pieces and reset  
as necessary.  
.4  
SET UP  
Format  
LCD brightness  
Mirror lock-up  
Video mode  
Date  
0
OFF  
Language  
Image comment  
Auto image rotation  
En  
OFF  
ON  
Return to SET UP menu.  
The Clock Battery  
The clock-calendar is powered by a separate, non-rechargeable CR1616 lithium bat-  
tery with a life of about four years. When this battery is exhausted, a icon will  
be displayed in the top control panel while the exposure meters are on. For infor-  
mation on replacing the clock battery, see “Technical Notes: Caring for Your Camera”  
(
239).  
CAUTION  
Use only CR1616 lithium batteries. Using another type of battery could cause an ex-  
plosion. Dispose of used batteries as directed.  
19  
5
Step 5—Attach a Lens  
Nikon recommends using a type G or type D CPU lens to take full advantage  
of the features the camera offers.  
CPU lenses have CPU  
contacts  
Type G lens  
Type D lens  
.1 Turn the camera off  
5
Turn the camera off before attaching or  
removing lenses.  
.2 Attach a lens  
5
Keeping the mounting mark on the lens  
aligned with the mounting mark on the  
camera body, position the lens in the cam-  
eras bayonet mount. Being careful not to  
press the lens-release button, rotate the lens  
counter-clockwise until it clicks into place.  
.3 Lock aperture at the minimum setting  
This step is not necessary if you are using a  
type G lens not equipped with an aperture  
ring. If you are using a lens of another type,  
lock aperture at the minimum setting (high-  
est f/-number).  
5
If this step is omitted when attaching a CPU  
lens, the aperture displays in the control  
panel and viewfinder will show a blinking  
when the camera is turned on. Photo-  
graphs can not be taken until the camera is  
turned off and aperture locked at the high-  
est f/-number.  
20  
5
Protect the Camera from Dirt and Dust  
Any dust, dirt, or other foreign matter inside your  
camera could show up as specks or blotches in your  
photographs or the viewfinder display. When no lens is  
in place, keep the lens mount covered with the supplied  
BF-1A body cap . When exchanging lens or replacing  
the body cap, keep the lens mount pointed down.  
Detaching the Lens  
Be sure the camera is off when removing or exchanging  
lenses. To remove the lens, press and hold the lens-re-  
lease button while turning the lens clockwise.  
21  
6
Step 6—Insert a Memory Card  
In place of film, the D2H uses CompactFlash memory cards or microdrive  
cards to store photographs. For a list of approved memory cards, see “Tech-  
nical Notes: Approved Memory Cards” ( 236).  
.1 Turn the camera off  
6
Turn the camera off before inserting or re-  
moving memory cards.  
.2 Open the card slot cover  
3
6
Open the door protecting the card-slot cov-  
er release button ( ) and press the release  
button ( ) to open the card slot ( ).  
2
1
.3 Insert a memory card  
Terminals  
Rear  
label  
6
Insert the memory card with the rear label  
toward the monitor ( ). When the memo-  
Direction of  
insertion  
ry card is fully inserted, the access lamp will  
light briefly and the eject button will pop up  
2
(
). Close the card slot cover.  
Inserting Memory Cards  
1
Insert the memory card terminals first. In-  
serting the card upside down or backwards  
could damage the camera or the card.  
Check to be sure that the card is in the cor-  
rect orientation.  
No Memory Card  
If no memory card is inserted in the camera when a  
charged EN-EL4 battery is inserted or the camera is  
powered by an AC adapter,  
will appear in the  
exposure-count displays in the control panel and view-  
finder.  
22  
6
.4 Format the memory card  
6
Memory cards must be formatted before first use.  
Formatting Memory Cards  
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes any data they  
may contain. Be sure to copy any photographs and other data you  
wish to keep to a computer before proceeding ( 223–226).  
To format the card, turn the camera on and hold the  
buttons down simultaneously for approximately two seconds. A blink-  
ing will appear in the shutter-speed display and the frame count  
(
and  
)
will blink. Pressing both buttons together a second time will format  
the memory card. Press any other button to exit without formatting.  
During formatting, the letters  
will appear in the frame-count dis-  
play. When formatting is complete, the frame-count display will show  
the number of photographs that can be recorded at current settings.  
During Formatting  
Do not remove the card or battery or unplug the AC adapter  
(available separately) during formatting.  
Format (  
207)  
Memory cards can also be formatted using the Format option in the setup menu.  
23  
6
Memory Cards  
• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing memory  
cards from the camera.  
• Format memory cards before first use.  
Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do not remove  
memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or remove or disconnect the  
power source during formatting or while data are being recorded, deleted, or copied  
to a computer. Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in  
damage to the camera or card.  
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.  
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this precaution could dam-  
age the card.  
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.  
• Do not expose to water, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.  
Removing Memory Cards  
Memory cards can be removed without loss of data  
1
when the camera is off. Before removing the memory  
card, wait for the green card access lamp next to the  
card slot cover to go out and then turn the camera  
off. Do NOT attempt to remove the card while the  
access lamp is on. Failure to observe this precaution  
could result in loss of data or in damage to the camera  
or card. Open the door protecting the card-slot cover  
release button and press the release button to open the  
card slot, then press the eject button to partially eject  
2
Access lamp  
the card ( ). The card can then be removed by hand  
(
). Do not push on the memory card while pressing  
the eject button. Failure to observe this precaution  
could damage the memory card.  
24  
Basic Photography  
Tutorial  
26–34  
Basic Photography and Playback  
Basic Playback  
35  
This chapter takes you step-by-step through the  
process of taking your first photographs and play-  
ing them back.  
Basic Photography  
This section describes how to use autofocus  
and programmed auto autoexposure for simple,  
“point-and-shoot” photography that will produce  
optimal results in most situations.  
Basic Playback  
Read this section for information on viewing pho-  
tographs in the monitor.  
25  
Basic Photography  
Taking Your First Photographs  
There are six basic steps to taking photographs:  
STEP 1  
Ready the Camera  
27–28  
15–24  
To learn more about the battery level display, see:  
• Introduction: First Steps..............................................  
To learn how to restore settings to their default values, see:  
Taking Photographs: Two-Button Reset.......................  
• Menu Guide: The Shooting Menu ..............................  
• Menu Guide: The Custom Settings Menu...................  
128  
161–169  
170–205  
STEP 2  
Adjust Camera Settings  
29–30  
To learn more about the following camera settings, see:  
Taking Photographs: Choosing a Shooting Mode........  
Taking Photographs: Image Quality and Size...............  
Taking Photographs: Sensitivity (ISO Equivalency)........  
Taking Photographs: White Balance............................  
Taking Photographs: Image Adjustment......................  
Taking Photographs: Focus .........................................  
Taking Photographs: Exposure....................................  
70–71  
41–47  
48–50  
51–64  
65–69  
72–83  
84–105  
STEP 3  
Frame the Photograph  
31  
To learn how to preview the effects of aperture, see:  
Taking Photographs: Exposure....................................  
To learn about optional viewfinder accessories, see:  
Technical Notes: Optional Accessories.........................  
84–105  
232  
32  
STEP 4  
STEP 5  
Focus  
To learn more about focus options, see:  
Taking Photographs: Focus .........................................  
72–83  
33  
Check Exposure  
To learn how to change the composition after setting exposure, see:  
Taking Photographs: Exposure....................................  
To learn more about flash photography, see:  
84–105  
Taking Photographs: Flash Photography......................  
106–117  
34  
STEP 6  
Take the Photograph  
For information on time-lapse photography, see:  
Taking Photographs: Interval Timer Photography ........  
To learn how to delay shutter release, see:  
118–122  
123  
Taking Photographs: Self-Timer Mode ........................  
26  
1
Step 1—Ready the Camera  
Before taking photographs, ready the camera as described below.  
.1 Turn the camera on  
1
The control panel will turn on and the dis-  
play in the viewfinder will light.  
.2 Check the battery level  
Check the battery level in the viewfinder or  
top control panel.  
1
Icon*  
Control View-  
panel finder  
Status  
Notes  
Battery fully  
charged  
Aperture and shutter-speed indicators in top  
control panel and all indicators in viewfinder  
turn off if no operations are performed for 6s  
(auto meter off). Press shutter-release button  
halfway to reactivate display.  
Battery  
partially  
discharged  
Low battery Ready fully-charged spare battery.  
Battery  
Shutter release disabled.  
(flashes) (flashes) exhausted  
*No icon displayed when camera powered by optional AC adapter.  
The Battery Indicator  
If the segments in the control panel battery icon blink on and off, the camera is calcu-  
lating the battery charge. The battery level will be displayed in about three seconds.  
The  
Icon  
icon in the control panel indicates that the battery has malfunctioned  
icon in the viewfinder may also  
flash). Contact a Nikon-authorized service representative.  
A flashing  
or is otherwise unsuitable for use in the D2H (the  
27  
1
.3 Check the number of exposures remaining  
The exposure-count displays in the top con-  
trol panel and viewfinder show the number  
of photographs that can be taken at cur-  
rent settings. When this number reaches  
zero, the icon will flash in the top control  
1
panel and a flashing  
icon will appear in  
the viewfinder. No further pictures can be  
taken until you delete pictures or insert a  
new memory card. You may be able to take  
additional pictures at lower image quality or  
size settings.  
28  
2
Step 2—Adjust Camera Settings  
This tutorial describes how to take photographs at the default settings listed  
in the table below, using a type G or D lens. Information on when and how  
to change settings from their default values is provided in “Taking Photo-  
graphs” ( 37).  
Option  
Default  
Description  
Pictures are compressed for balance between  
image quality and file size that is ideal for  
snapshots.  
Image  
quality  
NORM  
(JPEG Normal)  
41–  
44  
Image  
size  
L
44–  
45  
Images are 2,464×1,632 pixels in size.  
(Large)  
Sensitivity (digital equivalent of film speed) 48–  
set to value roughly equivalent to ISO 200. 50  
Sensitivity  
200  
White  
White balance is adjusted automatically for 51–  
(Auto)  
balance  
natural colors under most types of lighting.  
64  
Built-in exposure program automatically ad-  
justs shutter speed and aperture for optimal  
exposure in most situations.  
Exposure  
mode  
85–  
93  
(Programmed auto)  
Center focus area  
Focus  
area  
Camera focuses on subject in center focus  
area.  
74  
.1 Set the shooting mode to single frame ( 70)  
2
Hold the mode-dial lock release down (  
)
and turn the shooting mode dial ( ) to S  
(single frame). At this setting, the camera  
will take one photograph each time the  
shutter-release button is pressed.  
29  
2
.2 Choose single-area AF ( 76)  
2
Rotate the AF-area mode selector until it  
clicks into place pointing to  
(single-area  
AF). At this setting, the user can choose  
from eleven focus areas. Pressing the shut-  
ter-release button halfway locks focus at  
the distance to the subject in the selected  
focus area.  
.3 Choose single-servo autofocus ( 72)  
Rotate the focus-mode selector until it  
clicks into place pointing to S (single-servo  
autofocus). At this setting, the camera  
will automatically focus on the subject in  
the selected focus area when the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway. Pictures  
can only be taken when the camera is in  
focus.  
2
.4 Choose matrix metering ( 84)  
2
Press the metering selector lock button  
and rotate the metering selector to  
(matrix metering). Matrix metering uses  
information from all areas of the frame to  
determine exposure, ensuring optimal re-  
sults for the entire frame. If a type G or D  
lens is mounted on the camera, 3D matrix  
metering is used for exposure control that  
takes into account maximum brightness,  
contrast, and the distance to the subject.  
When matrix metering is selected, the metering display in the view-  
finder shows  
.
30  
3
Step 3—Frame a Photograph  
To prevent blurred photographs caused by unsteady hands (camera shake),  
hold the camera steadily in both hands, with your elbows propped lightly  
against your torso for support. Hold the handgrip in your right hand and  
cradle the camera body or lens with your left.  
The shutter-release button  
for vertical shooting ( 4)  
can be used when taking  
photographs in portrait  
(tall) orientation.  
The recommended stance for taking photographs is with one foot a half pace  
in front of the other and your upper body stable.  
Viewfinder Focus  
The viewfinder is equipped with diopter adjustment to  
accommodate individual differences in vision. To adjust  
viewfinder focus, pull the diopter adjustment knob out  
1
2
(
) and rotate it until the viewfinder display and focus  
brackets are in sharp focus ( ). When operating the  
diopter adjustment knob with your eye to the view-  
finder, be careful not to put your fingers or fingernails  
in your eye.  
Diopter can be adjusted in the range –3m–1 to +1m–1. Corrective lenses (available  
separately;  
232) allow diopters of –6m–1 to +3m–1.  
Attaching Diopter Adjustment Viewfinder Lenses  
Before attaching a diopter-adjustment viewfinder lens,  
remove the viewfinder eyepiece by closing the view-  
finder shutter to release the eyepiece lock ( ) and then  
unscrewing the eyepiece as shown at right ( ).  
31  
4
Step 4—Focus  
In single-servo AF, the camera focuses on the subject in the selected focus  
area when the shutter-release button is pressed halfway. After centering the  
focus brackets on your subject, press the shutter-release button halfway and  
check focus in the viewfinder.  
Viewfinder display  
Description  
Subject in focus.  
Focus point is between camera and subject.  
Focus point is behind subject.  
Camera unable to focus on subject in focus brackets using  
autofocus.  
(flashes)  
To focus on an off-center subject, use focus lock ( 80–81) or select the  
focus area containing your subject using the multi selector ( 74). For infor-  
mation on what to do if the camera is unable to focus using autofocus, see  
“Getting Good Results with Autofocus” ( 82).  
32  
5
Step 5—Check Exposure  
In exposure mode P (programmed auto), the cam-  
era automatically sets shutter speed and aperture  
when the shutter-release button is pressed half-  
way. Before shooting, check the shutter-speed  
and aperture indicators in the viewfinder. If the  
photo would be under- or over-exposed at cur-  
rent settings, one of the following indicators will  
appear in either the shutter-speed or aperture  
display.  
Indicator  
Description  
Photo will be overexposed. Use optional Neutral Density (ND) filter.  
Photo will be underexposed. Raise sensitivity (  
Speedlight ( 106).  
48–50) or use optional  
Shutter Speed and Camera Shake  
To prevent blurring caused by camera shake, the shutter speed should be faster than  
the inverse of the focal length of the lens, in seconds (for example, if a lens has a  
1
focal length of 50mm, shutter speed should be faster than /60 s). Use of a tripod is  
recommended when shooting at slower shutter speeds. To prevent blur, try increasing  
sensitivity ( 48–50) or using a VR lens. An optional Speedlight ( 106) can be used  
to prevent blur at shutter speeds of 1/60 s or slower.  
33  
6
Step 6—Take the Photograph  
Smoothly press the shutter-release button the  
rest of the way down.  
While the photograph is being recorded to the  
memory card after shooting, the access lamp  
next to the card slot cover will light. Do not  
eject the memory card, turn the camera off, or  
remove or disconnect the power source until the  
lamp has gone out. Removing the memory card  
or cutting power in these circumstances could  
result in loss of data.  
Do Not Photograph Strong Light Sources  
Avoid taking pictures with the camera focused on the sun or other strong light source.  
Intense light may cause deterioration in the LBCAST image sensor that the camera uses  
in place of film. It may also produce a white blur effect in the final photograph.  
Image Review (  
159)  
Photographs can be displayed at any time during or after recording by pressing the  
button. When On is selected for the Image review option in the playback menu,  
photographs are automatically displayed in the monitor immediately after shooting.  
34  
Basic Playback  
Viewing Photographs  
To play photographs back, press the button. The most recent photograph  
will be displayed in the monitor.  
100-1  
Viewing Additional Photographs  
To page through photographs in the order recorded, press the multi selector  
down. Press the multi selector up to view photographs in reverse order. To  
scroll rapidly through the images on the memory card, press and hold the up  
or down buttons on the multi selector.  
When the last photograph on the memory card is displayed, you can return  
to the first photograph by pressing the multi selector down. When the first  
photograph in memory is displayed, you can view the last photograph by  
pressing the multi selector up.  
Deleting Unwanted Photographs  
To delete the photograph currently  
displayed in the monitor, press the  
button. A confirmation dialog will be  
Delete?  
Yes  
displayed. Press the  
button again  
to delete the image and return to  
playback. To exit without deleting the  
picture, press the multi selector left or  
right.  
100-1  
Take Additional Photographs  
To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the  
the shutter-release button halfway.  
button or press  
Delete (  
148)  
To delete multiple images, use the Delete option in the playback menu.  
35  
36  
Using Camera Menus  
39–40  
Image Quality and Size  
Taking  
41–47  
Sensitivity (ISO Equivalency)  
Photographs  
48–50  
The Details  
White Balance  
51–64  
Image Adjustment  
65–69  
Tutorial: Basic Photography” described the basic  
order of operations for taking photographs at the  
most commonly-used settings. This chapter ex-  
plains how and when to adjust camera settings for  
different shooting conditions.  
Choosing a Shooting Mode  
70–71  
Focus  
72–83  
Exposure  
84–105  
Flash Photography  
106–117  
IntervalTimer Photography  
118–122  
Self-Timer Mode  
123  
Non-CPU Lenses  
124–127  
Two-Button Reset  
128  
37  
The chart below shows the basic order for adjusting settings when taking  
photographs. Before proceeding, be sure to read “Using Camera Menus”  
(
39) for information on menu operations.  
How will this photograph be used?  
Image Quality and Size..........................................................  
Image Adjustment ................................................................  
41–47  
65–69  
What lighting is available?  
Sensitivity (ISO Equivalency)...................................................  
White Balance.......................................................................  
48–50  
51–64  
Will this be a single photo, or a series of photos?  
Choosing a Shooting Mode ..................................................  
70–71  
72–83  
84  
What is the subject, and how will I compose the photography?  
Focus....................................................................................  
How important is background lighting to the photograph?  
Exposure: Metering...............................................................  
What is more important, shutter speed or aperture?  
Exposure: Exposure Mode......................................................  
85–94  
Is the subject very bright, very dark, or high contrast?  
Exposure: Exposure Compensation ........................................  
Exposure: Bracketing.............................................................  
97  
98–105  
Will I need a flash?  
Flash Photography ................................................................  
106–117  
How do I want to control the shutter?  
Interval Timer Photography ...................................................  
Self-Timer Mode ...................................................................  
118–122  
123  
38  
Using Camera Menus  
Basic Menu Operations  
The next four sections involve settings that can be accessed via the camera  
menus. To view the camera menus, press the button.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Shooting menu bank  
A
Reset shooting menu  
Active folder  
100  
DSC  
NORM  
File name  
Image quality  
Image size  
Raw compression  
White bal.  
ON  
A
Choosing a Menu  
The camera has four main menus: the playback menu, the shooting menu,  
the Custom Settings menu, and the setup menu. When the menu button  
is pressed, the camera displays the last menu used. To select a different  
menu:  
SHOOTING MENU  
SET UP  
Shooting menu bank  
Reset shooting menu  
Active folder  
A
Format  
1
2
LCD brightness  
Mirror lock-up  
Video mode  
Date  
0
100  
DSC  
NORM  
OFF  
File name  
Image quality  
Image size  
Raw compression  
White bal.  
Language  
Image comment  
Auto image rotation  
En  
OFF  
ON  
ON  
A
If menu item is highlighted, press  
button.  
Select menu.  
Position cursor in selected menu.  
SET UP  
Format  
3
LCD brightness  
Mirror lock-up  
Video mode  
Date  
0
OFF  
Language  
Image comment  
Auto image rotation  
En  
OFF  
ON  
39  
Making a Selection  
To modify settings for an item in the current menu:  
SET UP  
Format  
LCD brightness  
Mirror lock-up  
Video mode  
Date  
Language  
Image comment  
Auto image rotation  
SET UP  
Video mode  
1
3
2
4
0
OFF  
NTSC  
PAL  
OK  
En  
OFF  
ON  
Highlight menu item.  
Display options.  
SET UP  
Video mode  
SET UP  
Format  
LCD brightness  
Mirror lock-up  
Video mode  
Date  
0
OFF  
NTSC  
PAL  
PTP  
Language  
Image comment  
Auto image rotation  
En  
OFF  
ON  
OK  
Highlight option.  
Make selection.  
To return to the previous menu without making a selection, press the multi  
selector to the left.  
• The selection for some options is made from a sub-menu. Repeat steps 3  
and 4 to make a selection from a sub-menu.  
• Some menu items are not available while images are being recorded to the  
memory card.  
• Pressing the  
button or the center of the multi selector performs the  
same function as pressing the multi selector to the right. In some cases,  
a selection can only be made using  
selector.  
button or the center of the multi  
Exiting the Menus  
To exit the menus, press the  
the button twice). You can also exit the menus by pressing the  
button (if a menu option is highlighted, press  
but-  
ton to turn the monitor off or by turning the camera off. To exit the menus  
and focus the camera for the next shot, press the shutter-release button  
halfway.  
40  
Image Quality and Size  
Making Effective Use of Memory  
Together, image quality and size determine how much space each photo-  
graph occupies on the memory card.  
Image Quality  
The D2H supports the following image quality options (listed in descending  
order by image quality and file size):  
Option  
NEF+JPEG Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one fine-quality  
Fine JPEG image.  
Description  
NEF+JPEG Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one normal-qual-  
Normal ity JPEG image.  
NEF+JPEG Two images are recorded, one NEF (RAW) image and one basic-quality  
Basic  
JPEG image.  
Raw 12-bit data from the LBCAST image sensor are saved directly to  
the memory card in Nikon Electronic Image Format (NEF).  
NEF (Raw)  
Images are saved in uncompressed TIFF-RGB at a color depth of eight  
bits per channel (24-bit color).  
TIFF (RGB)  
Images are saved in JPEG format at a compression ratio of roughly  
1:4.  
JPEG Fine  
JPEG  
Images are saved in JPEG format at a compression ratio of roughly  
Normal 1:8.  
Images are saved in JPEG format at a compression ratio of roughly  
1:16.  
JPEG Basic  
NEF (Raw)/NEF+JPEG  
File compression for NEF images is controlled from the Raw compression menu (  
44). The following options are available:  
Comp. NEF (Raw): NEF images are compressed using a “lossless” algorithm that re-  
duces file size by approximately fifty to sixty percent without affecting image quality  
(
46–47).  
NEF (Raw): NEF images are not compressed.  
NEF images can only be viewed in the software provided with the camera or in Nikon  
Capture 4 (  
223). When photographs taken at NEF+JPEG Fine, NEF+JPEG Nor-  
mal, or NEF+JPEG Basic are viewed on the camera, only the JPEG image will be  
displayed. When photographs taken at these settings are deleted, both NEF and JPEG  
images will be deleted.  
41  
Image quality can be set using the Image quality option in the shooting  
menu or by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the main command dial.  
When NEF (Raw) is selected, a compression option can be selected from the  
Raw compression menu.  
The Image Quality Menu  
Highlight Image quality in the shooting  
SHOOTING MENU  
1
2
menu ( 167) and press the multi selector to  
the right.  
Shooting menu bank  
Reset shooting menu  
Active folder  
A
100  
DSC  
NORM  
File name  
Image quality  
Image size  
Raw compression  
White bal.  
ON  
A
Highlight the desired option and press the  
multi selector to the right. The shooting menu  
will be displayed.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Image quality  
(
)+  
NEF Raw JPEG Fine  
(
)+  
NEF Raw JPEG Normal  
NEF Raw JPEG Basic  
(
)+  
(
)
NEF Raw  
(
)
TIFF RGB  
JPEG Fine  
JPEG Normal  
JPEG Basic  
OK  
White Balance Bracketing  
White balance bracketing can not be used with NEF (RAW) images. Selecting an NEF  
(RAW) option for image quality cancels white balance bracketing. White balance for  
NEF (RAW) images can be adjusted using Nikon Capture 4 (available separately;  
223).  
File Names  
Photographs are stored as image files with names of the form “DSC_nnnn.xxx,” where  
nnnn is a four-digit number between 0001 and 9999 assigned automatically in ascend-  
ing order by the camera, and xxx is one of the following three letter extensions: “NEF”  
for NEF images, “TIF” for TIFF-RGB, “JPG” for JPEG images, and “NDF” for Dust Off  
ref photos ( 214–215). The NEF and JPEG files recorded at a setting of “NEF+JPEG”  
have the same file names but different extensions. Images recorded at a Color Mode  
setting of II (Adobe RGB) (  
67) have names that begin with an underbar (e.g.,  
“_DSC0001.JPG”). The “DSC” portion of the file name can be changed using the File  
name option in the shooting menu (  
166).  
42  
The QUAL Button  
Image quality can also be set by pressing the  
QUAL button and rotating the main command  
dial (note that NEF (RAW) compression can only  
be adjusted in the Raw compression menu). Im-  
age quality is displayed in the rear control panel  
and in the viewfinder sidebar:  
Option  
Rear panel  
Viewfinder  
+
RAW FINE  
NEF+JPEG  
Fine  
Rear control panel  
+
RAW  
RAW  
RAW  
NEF+JPEG  
Normal  
NORM  
+
NEF+JPEG  
Basic  
BASIC  
NEF (Raw)  
TIFF (RGB)  
JPEG Fine  
Viewfinder  
TIFF  
FINE  
NORM  
BASIC  
JPEG Normal  
JPEG Basic  
43  
The Raw Compression Menu  
The Raw compression menu controls whether NEF (RAW) images are  
compressed. The setting chosen in the Raw compression menu takes ef-  
fect whenever image quality is set to NEF+JPEG Fine, NEF+JPEG Normal,  
NEF+JPEG Basic, or NEF (Raw). NEF compression can not be selected us-  
ing the QUAL button and command dials.  
Highlight Raw compression in the shooting  
SHOOTING MENU  
1
2
menu ( 167) and press the multi selector to  
the right.  
Shooting menu bank  
Reset shooting menu  
Active folder  
A
100  
DSC  
NORM  
File name  
Image quality  
Image size  
Raw compression  
White bal.  
ON  
A
Highlight the desired option and press the  
multi selector to the right. The shooting menu  
will be displayed.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Raw compression  
(
ON Comp. NEF Raw OK  
(
)
OFF NEF Raw  
Image Size  
Image size is measured in pixels. Smaller sizes produce smaller files, making  
them suited to distribution via e-mail or inclusion in web pages. Conversely,  
the larger the image, the larger the size at which it can be printed without  
becoming noticeably “grainy. Choose image size according to the space  
available on the memory card and the task at hand.  
Option  
Size (pixels) Size when printed at 200 dpi (approx.)  
L
Large (2464×1632)  
2,464×1,632  
31.3×20.7cm (12˝×8˝)  
23.4×15.5cm (9˝×6˝)  
M Medium (1840×1224) 1,840×1,224  
44  
Image size can be set using the Image size option in the shooting menu or  
by pressing the QUAL button and rotating the sub-command dial. Note that  
the option selected does not affect the size of NEF (RAW) images. When  
opened in the software provided with the camera or in Nikon Capture 4, NEF  
images are 2,464×1,632 pixels in size.  
The Image Size Menu  
Highlight Image size in the shooting menu  
SHOOTING MENU  
1
2
(
167) and press the multi selector to the  
Shooting menu bank  
Reset shooting menu  
Active folder  
A
right.  
100  
DSC  
NORM  
File name  
Image quality  
Image size  
Raw compression  
White bal.  
ON  
A
Highlight the desired option and press the  
multi selector to the right. The shooting menu  
will be displayed.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Image size  
Large 2464x1632  
(
)
4.0M  
OK  
Medium 1840x1224  
(
)
2.2M  
The QUAL Button  
Image size can also be set by pressing the QUAL  
button and rotating the sub-command dial. Im-  
age size is displayed in the rear control panel and  
in the viewfinder sidebar:  
Rear control panel  
Viewfinder  
45  
Memory Card Capacity and Image Quality/Size  
The following table shows the approximate number of pictures that can be stored on  
a 512MB card at different image quality and size settings.  
Image  
quality  
Raw  
compression  
Image  
size  
L‡  
M‡  
L‡  
M‡  
L‡  
M‡  
L‡  
M‡  
L‡  
M‡  
L‡  
M‡  
L
File  
size*  
**  
No. of  
Buffer  
images* capacity†  
††  
24  
Comp. NEF (Raw)  
NEF (Raw)  
**  
††  
24  
NEF+JPEG Fine  
NEF+JPEG Normal  
NEF+JPEG Basic  
7.9MB  
58  
25  
25  
24  
24  
25  
25  
24  
24  
25  
25  
25  
26  
35  
35  
40  
40  
40  
40  
40  
40  
7.1MB  
66  
**  
††  
Comp. NEF (Raw)  
NEF (Raw)  
**  
††  
6.6MB  
67  
6.1MB  
71  
**  
††  
Comp. NEF (Raw)  
NEF (Raw)  
**  
††  
6.5MB  
72  
6.3MB  
75  
‡‡  
††  
Comp. NEF (Raw)  
NEF (Raw)  
TIFF (RGB)  
JPEG Fine  
NEF (Raw)  
6.0MB  
11.5MB  
6.5MB  
79  
41  
M
L
74  
1.9MB  
222  
390  
433  
709  
780  
1300  
M
L
1.1MB  
0.98MB  
0.56MB  
0.49MB  
0.28MB  
JPEG Normal  
JPEG Basic  
M
L
M
46  
*
All figures are approximate. Size of JPEG files varies with scene recorded.  
Maximum number of frames that can be stored in memory buffer.  
Image size applies to JPEG images only. When opened in software provided with  
camera or in Nikon Capture 4, NEF images are 2,464×1,632 pixels in size.  
**Total file size of NEF (RAW) and JPEG images. File size of compressed NEF (RAW) im-  
ages is approximately fifty to sixty percent of uncompressed NEF images.  
Number of exposures remaining shown in control and viewfinder is the same as in  
the case of uncompressed NEF (RAW) images. The actual number of images that can  
be stored on the memory card is higher than shown.  
File size of compressed NEF (RAW) images is approximately fifty to sixty percent of  
uncompressed NEF images.  
Number of Exposures Remaining  
The number of exposures remaining shown in the exposure count displays in the  
control panel and viewfinder is only an approximation. The number of compressed  
NEF or JPEG images that can be stored on a memory card depends on the subject and  
composition of each photograph. In general, the more detailed the image, the larger  
the resulting file and the fewer the images that can be stored.  
Large-Capacity Memory Cards  
When enough memory remains on the memory card to  
record a thousand or more pictures at current settings,  
the number of exposures remaining will be shown in  
thousands, rounded down to the nearest hundred (e.g.,  
if there is room for approximately 1,260 exposures, the  
exposure count display will show 1.2K).  
d2—Maximum Shots (  
188)  
In continuous mode, Custom Setting d2 (Maximum shots) can be used to limit the  
maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst to any amount  
between one and forty.  
47  
Sensitivity (ISO Equivalency)  
Reacting Faster to Light  
“Sensitivity” is the digital equivalent of film speed. The higher the sensitivity,  
the less light needed to make an exposure, allowing higher shutter speeds  
or smaller apertures.  
Sensitivity can be set between values roughly equivalent to ISO 200 and ISO  
1600 in steps equivalent to 1/3 EV. Higher values of HI-1 (approximately equiv-  
alent to ISO 3200) and HI-2 (approximately equivalent to ISO 6400) are also  
available for situations in which high sensitivity is a priority. Sensitivity can be  
adjusted using the ISO option in the shooting menu or by pressing the ISO  
button and rotating the main command dial.  
The ISO Menu  
Highlight ISO in the shooting menu ( 168)  
SHOOTING MENU  
1
2
and press the multi selector to the right.  
White bal.  
A
200  
A
ISO  
Image sharpening  
Tone compensation  
Color mode  
Hue adjustment  
Intvl timer shooting  
Non-CPU lens data  
A
I
0°  
OFF  
Highlight the desired option and press the  
multi selector to the right. The shooting menu  
will be displayed.  
SHOOTING MENU  
ISO  
2 0 0  
2 5 0  
3 2 0  
4 0 0  
5 0 0  
6 4 0  
8 0 0  
OK  
HI-1/HI-2  
The higher the sensitivity, the more likely pictures are to be subject to “noise” in the  
form of randomly-spaced, brightly-colored pixels. Photos taken at settings of HI-1  
and HI-2 will likely contain appreciable amounts of noise. Use only to capture natural  
lighting under low light conditions or when a fast shutter speed is required to prevent  
blurring. Nikon recommends that image sharpening (  
settings to avoid heightening the effects of noise.  
65) be turned off at these  
48  
The ISO Button  
Sensitivity can also be set by pressing the ISO  
button and rotating the main command dial.  
Sensitivity is displayed in the control panels and  
viewfinder sidebar:  
Top control panel  
Rear control panel  
Viewfinder  
*
Viewfinder display shows  
Viewfinder display shows  
.
.
b1—ISO Auto (  
182)  
When ON is selected for Custom Setting b1 (ISO Auto), the camera will automatically  
vary sensitivity from the value selected by the user to help ensure optimum exposure.  
Sensitivity can not be set to HI-1 or HI-2 while ISO Auto is on, and ON can not be  
selected for ISO Auto is when ISO is set to HI-1 or HI-2.  
d6—Control Panel/Viewfinder Display>Rear Control Panel (  
192)  
If Frame Count is selected for Control panel/viewfinder display>Rear control  
panel (Custom Setting d6), sensitivity will only be displayed in the rear control panel  
while the ISO button is pressed. If ISO is selected, sensitivity will be displayed except  
during voice memo recording and playback.  
49  
b2—ISO Step Value (  
183)  
Depending on the option selected for Custom Setting b2, sensitivity can also be set in  
increments equivalent to ½ or 1EV.  
ISO step value set to 1/2 step  
ISO step value set to 1 step  
If possible, the current sensitivity setting is maintained when the step value is changed.  
If the current sensitivity setting is not available at the new step value, sensitivity will be  
rounded up to the nearest available setting.  
50  
White Balance  
Keeping Colors True  
The color of light reflected from an object varies with the color of the light  
source. The human brain is able to adapt to changes in the color of the light  
source, with the result that white objects appear white whether seen in the  
shade, direct sunlight, or under incandescent lighting. Unlike the film used in  
film cameras, digital cameras can mimic this adjustment by processing infor-  
mation from the 1,005-pixel RGB sensor, LBCAST image sensor, and ambient  
light sensor according to the color of the light source. This is known as “white  
balance.” For natural coloration, choose a white balance setting that matches  
the light source before shooting. The following options are available:  
Approximate  
color  
Option  
temperature  
Description  
Color temperature measured using 1,005-pixel  
RGB sensor, LBCAST image sensor, and ambient  
light sensor and white balance adjusted auto-  
matically. For best results, use type G or D lens.  
With SB-800 Speedlight, white balance reflects  
conditions in effect when Speedlight fires.  
3,500–  
8,000K  
Auto  
Incandescent  
Fluorescent  
Direct sunlight  
Flash  
3,000K  
4,200K  
5,200K  
5,400K  
6,000K  
8,000K  
Use under incandescent lighting.  
Use under fluorescent lighting.  
Use with subjects lit by direct sunlight.  
Use with Nikon Speedlights.  
Cloudy  
Use in daylight under overcast skies.  
Use in daylight with subjects in the shade.  
Choose color temperature from list of values  
Shade  
Choose color  
temp.  
2,500–  
10,000K  
(
56).  
Use subject, light source, or existing photo-  
graph as reference for white balance ( 57).  
White bal.  
preset  
Auto white balance is recommended with most light sources. If the desired  
results can not be achieved with auto white balance, choose an option from  
the list above or use preset white balance. In auto and preset modes, the  
camera uses “through-the-lens” (TTL) white balance measurement to ensure  
that white balance is set correctly even when the camera and subject are  
under different lighting.  
51  
White balance can be set using the White bal. option in the shooting menu  
or by pressing the WB button and rotating the main command dial.  
The White Balance Menu  
Highlight White bal. in the shooting menu  
SHOOTING MENU  
1
2
(
167) and press the multi selector to the  
Shooting menu bank  
Reset shooting menu  
Active folder  
A
right.  
100  
DSC  
NORM  
File name  
Image quality  
Image size  
Raw compression  
White bal.  
ON  
A
Highlight the desired option and press the  
multi selector to the right. If Choose color  
temp. is selected, a menu of color tempera-  
tures will be displayed ( 56). If White bal.  
preset is selected, a menu of preset white  
balance options will be displayed ( 57). In  
all other cases, a white-balance fine-tuning  
dialog will be displayed ( 54).  
SHOOTING MENU  
White bal.  
Auto  
Incandescent  
Fluorescent  
Direct sunlight  
Flash  
Cloudy  
Shade  
Studio Strobe Lighting  
Auto white balance may not produce the desired results with studio strobe lighting.  
Choose a color temperature, use preset white balance, or set white balance to Flash  
and use fine tuning to adjust white balance.  
Color Temperature  
The perceived color of a light source varies with the viewer and other conditions. Color  
temperature is an objective measure of the color of a light source, defined with ref-  
erence to the temperature to which an object would have to be heated to radiate light  
in the same wavelengths. While light sources with a color temperature in the neigh-  
borhood of 5,000–5,500K appear white, light sources with a lower color temperature,  
such as incandescent light bulbs, appear slightly yellow or red. Light sources with a  
higher color temperature appear tinged with blue.  
52  
The WB Button  
White balance can also be set by pressing the  
WB button and rotating the main command dial.  
White balance is displayed in the rear control  
panel and in the viewfinder sidebar:  
Rear control panel  
Viewfinder  
e5—Auto BKT Set (  
196)  
When WB bracketing is selected for custom setting e5 (Auto BKT Set), the camera  
will create several images each time the shutter is released. White balance will be  
varied with each image, “bracketing” the value selected in the white balance menu or  
using the ISO button.  
53  
Fine-Tuning White Balance  
At settings other than  
(Choose color temp.) and PRE (preset), white  
balance can be “fine tuned” to compensate for variations in the color of  
the light source or to introduce a deliberate “warm” or “cold” cast into  
an image. Higher settings can be used to lend images a bluish tinge or to  
compensate for light sources with a yellow or red cast, while lowering white  
balance can make photographs appear slightly more yellow or red or com-  
pensate for light sources with a blue cast. Adjustments can be made in the  
range +3 to –3 in increments of one. Except in Fluorescent mode, each  
increment is equivalent to about 10 mired.  
White balance is fine tuned using the White bal. option in the shooting  
menu or by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub-command dial.  
The White Balance Menu  
In the white balance menu ( 52), highlight  
SHOOTING MENU  
White bal.  
1
2
an option other than Choose color temp.  
or White bal. preset and press the multi  
selector to the right.  
Auto  
Incandescent  
Fluorescent  
Direct sunlight  
Flash  
Cloudy  
Shade  
Press the multi selector up or down to choose  
the desired value and press the multi selector  
to the right. The shooting menu will be dis-  
played.  
SHOOTING MENU  
White bal.  
Auto  
OK  
0
“Mired”  
Any given change in color temperature produces a greater difference in color at low  
color temperatures than it would at higher color temperatures. For example, a change  
of 100K produces a much greater change in color at 3000K than at 6000K. Mired,  
calculated by multiplying the inverse of the color temperature by 106, is a measure of  
color temperature that takes such variation into account, and as such is the unit used  
in color-temperature compensation filters. E.g.:  
• 4000K–3000K(a difference of 1000K)=83mired  
• 7000K–6000K(a difference of 1000K)=24mired  
54  
The WB Button  
White balance can also be fine-tuned by pressing  
the WB button and rotating the sub-command  
dial. White balance is displayed in the rear control  
panel; at settings other than 0, a  
icon ap-  
pears in the rear control panel and in the view-  
finder sidebar:  
Rear control panel  
Viewfinder  
Fine-Tuning and Color Temperature  
Approximate color-temperatures for settings other than A (auto) are given below (val-  
ues may differ from color temperatures given by photo color meters):  
Direct  
Cloudy  
Shade  
Incandescent Fluorescent* sunlight  
Flash  
(daylight)  
(daylight)  
+3  
+2  
+1  
0
2,700K  
2,800K  
2,900K  
3,000K  
3,100K  
3,200K  
3,300K  
2,700K  
3,000K  
3,700K  
4,200K  
5,000K  
6,500K  
7,200K  
4,800K  
4,900K  
5,000K  
5,200K  
5,300K  
5,400K  
5,600K  
4,800K  
5,000K  
5,200K  
5,400K  
5,600K  
5,800K  
6,000K  
5,400K  
5,600K  
5,800K  
6,000K  
6,200K  
6,400K  
6,600K  
6,700K  
7,100K  
7,500K  
8,000K  
8,400K  
8,800K  
9,200K  
–1  
–2  
–3  
*The size of the increments for Fluorescent reflects the wide variations in color tem-  
perature among the many different types of fluorescent light source, ranging from  
low-temperature stadium lighting to high-temperature mercury-vapor lamps.  
55  
Choosing a Color Temperature  
Choose a setting of (Choose color temp.) to select the color temperature  
from thirty-one predetermined values ranging from 2,500K to 10,000K in  
increments of roughly 10 mired (note that the desired results will not be ob-  
tained with flash or fluorescent lighting). Color temperature can be selected  
in the white-balance menu or with the WB button and sub-command dial.  
The White Balance Menu  
In the white balance menu ( 52), highlight  
an Choose color temp. and press the multi  
selector to the right.  
SHOOTING MENU  
White bal.  
1
2
Fluorescent  
Direct sunlight  
Flash  
Cloudy  
Shade  
Choose color temp.  
White bal. preset  
Highlight the desired color temperature and  
press the multi selector to the right. The  
shooting menu will be displayed.  
SHOOTING MENU  
White bal.  
Choose color temp.  
5 0 0 0  
5 3 0 0  
5 6 0 0  
5 9 0 0  
6 3 0 0  
6 7 0 0  
K
K
K
K
K
K
OK  
The WB Button  
At a setting of  
(Choose color temp.), color  
temperature can be selected by pressing the WB  
button and rotating the sub-command dial. The  
color temperature is displayed in the rear control  
panel:  
Take Test Shots  
Take a test shot to determine if the selected value is appropriate to the light source.  
56  
Preset White Balance  
Preset white balance is used to record and recall custom white balance set-  
tings for shooting under mixed lighting or to compensate for light sources  
with a strong color cast. Four options are available for setting preset white  
balance:  
Recording New Values with the Camera  
(1) Frame a neutral gray or white object and press the shutter-release button  
to measure a value for white balance ( 59).  
(2) Measure white balance with the ambient light sensor ( 59).  
Copying Values from Existing Photographs  
(3) Copy white balance from another photograph on the memory card (  
63).  
(4) Copy white balance from Nikon Capture 4 (available separately;  
64).  
The camera can store up to five values for preset white balance in presets  
d-0–d-4. White balance values recorded with options (1) and (2) are stored  
in preset d-0. To prevent this value from being replaced the next time white  
balance is measured, the value stored in d-0 can be copied to presets d-1–d-4  
for long-term storage ( 64). White balance values copied using options  
(3) and (4) are also stored in presets d-1–d-4. A descriptive comment can be  
added to any white balance preset ( 62).  
d-0  
d-1d-4  
SHOOTING MENU  
Select Set  
SHOOTING MENU  
Selet et  
Stores last val-  
ue measured  
for white bal-  
Store values copied from d-0 (  
64).  
d-1  
d-3  
d-2  
d-4  
d-
ance (  
58).  
:
:
-
-
1
d
0
d
SHOOTING MENU  
Set Zoom  
SHOOTING MENU  
Store values cop-  
Select  
Set  
ied from images  
on memory card  
d-0  
d-1  
d-3  
d-2  
d-4  
100-1  
100-2  
100-3  
(
63).  
:
100-4  
100-5  
100-6  
-
1
d
Store values created in Nikon Capture 4 (  
64).  
White Balance Presets  
Changes to white balance presets apply to all shooting menu banks (  
162). A con-  
firmation dialog will be displayed if the user attempts to change a white balance preset  
created in another shooting menu bank (no warning is displayed for preset d-0).  
57  
Measuring a Value for White Balance  
White balance can be measured with reference to a neutral gray object or by  
measuring the color of the light source. The new value for white balance is  
automatically stored in preset d-0.  
Reference  
Description  
Neutral gray or white object is placed under lighting that will be used in  
final photograph and white balance is measured using cameras 1,005-  
pixel RGB sensor. Use for flash photography or when the subject and  
camera are under different lighting. In studio settings, 18% diffusion  
panel can be used to make reference object appear gray.  
Neutral  
gray  
object  
Color of light source is measured by sensor on camera pentaprism and  
white balance adjusted to produce natural coloration without reference  
object. Use when subject is under same lighting as camera.  
Light  
source  
Press the WB button and rotate the main  
command dial until is displayed in the rear  
control panel or viewfinder sidebar.  
1
Rear control panel  
Viewfinder  
If the new value for preset white balance will be used immediately, select  
preset d-0 by pressing the WB button and rotating the sub-command dial  
until d-0 is displayed in the rear control panel ( 61). Otherwise there is  
no need to select d-0 when measuring a new value for white balance.  
58  
Release the WB button briefly and then press  
the button until the icon in the rear control  
panel and viewfinder sidebar start to flash. A  
blinking will also appear in the top control  
2
3
panel and viewfinder frame-count displays.  
Rear control panel  
Top control panel  
Viewfinder  
To measure white balance using a neutral gray or white object…  
…frame the reference object so that it fills the  
viewfinder and press the shutter-release but-  
ton all the way down. The camera will mea-  
sure a value for white balance and store it in  
preset d-0. No photograph will be recorded;  
white balance can be measured accurately  
even when the camera is not in focus.  
To measure the color of the light source…  
…make sure that the ambient light sensor is  
lit by the light source and press the FUNC.  
button. The camera will calculate a value for  
white balance and store it in preset d-0.  
To exit without measuring a new value for  
white balance, press the WB button.  
Exposure Mode  
Preset white balance can be measured in all exposure modes. In all modes, exposure  
is automatically increased by one EV to ensure accurate results. In manual exposure  
mode, optimal results can be obtained by setting exposure to 0EV as indicated by the  
electronic analog exposure display.  
59  
If the camera was able to measure a value for white balance,  
will  
4
flash for about three seconds in the control panels, while the viewfinder  
will show a flashing  
.
Viewfinder  
Rear control panel  
Top control panel  
If lighting is too dark or too bright, or if some types of artificial lighting  
are used when measuring white balance using the ambient light sensor,  
the camera may be unable to measure white balance. A flashing  
will appear in the control panels and viewfinder for about three seconds.  
Return to Step 3 and measure white balance again. If the camera is un-  
able to measure white balance using the ambient light sensor, try mea-  
suring white balance using a neutral gray or white reference object.  
Viewfinder  
Rear control panel  
Top control panel  
SHOOTING MENU  
The new value for white balance will be stored in  
preset d-0, automatically replacing the previous  
value for this preset (no confirmation dialog will  
be displayed). If white balance was set using a  
reference object, a thumbnail will be displayed in  
the preset white balance list. Presets measured  
using the ambient light sensor are marked by a  
icon.  
Select  
Set  
d-0  
d-1  
d-2  
d-2  
SHOOTING MENU  
Select Set  
d-0  
d-1  
To use the new value for white balance, select preset d-0 (if no value has  
been measured for white balance before d-0 is selected, white balance  
will be set to a color temperature of 5,200K, the same as Direct sun-  
light). The new white balance value will remain in preset d-0 until white  
balance is measured again. By copying preset d-0 to one of the other  
presets before measuring a new value for white balance, up to five white  
balance values can be stored ( 64).  
60  
Selecting a White Balance Preset  
To set white balance to a preset value:  
Highlight White bal. preset in the white  
SHOOTING MENU  
Select Set  
1
2
balance menu ( 52) and press the multi se-  
lector to the right. The menu shown at right  
will be displayed. (To return to the shooting  
d-0  
d-1  
d-3  
d-2  
d-4  
menu, press the  
button.)  
:
-
d 0  
Presets are identified by an icon or thumbnail,  
a name (d-0d-4), and a comment. Press the  
multi selector up, down, left, or right to high-  
light the desired preset. To select the high-  
lighted preset and return to shooting mode  
without completing steps 3–5, press the  
button.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Select Set  
d-0  
d-1  
d-3  
d-2  
d-4  
:
-
d 1  
Press the center of the multi selector to display  
the menu shown at right. To view options for  
other presets, highlight the name of the cur-  
rent preset (d-0d-4) and press the multi  
selector right.  
SHOOTING MENU  
White bal.  
White bal. preset  
3
-
d 1  
Set  
OK  
Edit comment  
Select image  
Copy d-0  
Selecting a White Balance Preset: the WB Button  
At a setting of  
(White bal. preset), presets can also  
be selected by pressing the WB button and rotating the  
sub-command dial. The current preset is displayed in  
the rear control panel while the WB button is pressed.  
61  
Press the multi selector up or down to high-  
light Set.  
SHOOTING MENU  
White bal.  
White bal. preset  
4
5
-
d 1  
Set  
OK  
Edit comment  
Select image  
Copy d-0  
Press the multi selector to the right to set  
white balance to the value stored in the  
selected preset and return to the shooting  
menu.  
SHOOTING MENU  
White bal.  
Fluorescent  
Direct sunlight  
Flash  
Cloudy  
Shade  
Choose color temp.  
White bal. preset  
Entering a Comment  
To enter a descriptive comment of up to thirty-six  
characters for a selected white balance preset,  
highlight the preset in the thumbnail display and  
press the center of the multi selector as described  
in steps 1–3 on the previous page. The menu  
shown at right will be displayed.  
SHOOTING MENU  
White bal.  
White bal. preset  
-
d 1  
Set  
OK  
Edit comment  
Select image  
Copy d-0  
Press the multi selector up or down to high-  
light Edit comment.  
SHOOTING MENU  
White bal.  
White bal. preset  
1
2
-
d 0  
Set  
Edit comment  
Select image  
Copy d-0  
Press the multi selector to the right to display  
the text edit dialog. Edit the comment as de-  
scribed on page 210.  
SHOOTING MENU  
cursor Input  
OK  
.
< =  
!
"
# $ % &  
'
(
)
*
+
:
,
;
/
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
> ?@A B C D E F G H I J K L  
M N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z  
_ a b c d e g h l m  
n o p q u v w x y z  
[
]
f
i
j
k
r
s
t
{
}
62  
SHOOTING MENU  
Select Set  
Press the button to return to the thumbnail  
display.  
3
d-0  
d-1  
d-3  
d-2  
d-4  
:
-
d 1 Beach  
Copying White Balance from a Photograph (d-1d-4 Only)  
To copy a value for white balance from a photo-  
graph on the memory card to a selected preset  
(d-1d-4 only), highlight the preset in the thumb-  
nail display and press the center of the multi se-  
lector as described in steps 1–3 on page 61. The  
menu shown at right will be displayed.  
SHOOTING MENU  
White bal.  
White bal. preset  
-
d 1  
Set  
OK  
Edit comment  
Select image  
Copy d-0  
Press the multi selector up or down to high-  
light Select image.  
SHOOTING MENU  
White bal.  
White bal. preset  
1
2
3
-
d 1  
Set  
Edit comment  
Select image  
Copy d-0  
Press the multi selector to the right to display  
the photographs on the memory card. Only  
photographs taken with the D2H will be dis-  
played; other images can not be selected.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Set Zoom  
100-1  
100-2  
100-5  
100-3  
100-6  
100-4  
Press the multi selector up, down, left, or right  
to highlight the desired image. To view the  
highlighted image full frame, press the but-  
ton. Press the button again to return to the  
thumbnail list.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Set Zoom  
100-1  
100-2  
100-5  
100-3  
100-6  
100-4  
63  
Press the center of the multi selector to copy  
the white balance value for the highlighted  
photograph to the selected preset and return  
to the thumbnail display. If the highlighted  
photograph has a comment, the comment  
will be copied to the comment for the selected  
preset.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Select Set  
4
d-0  
d-1  
d-3  
d-2  
d-4  
:
-
d 1  
Copying White Balance from d-0 to Presets d-1d-4  
To copy a measured value for white balance  
SHOOTING MENU  
White bal. preset  
White bal.  
from d-0 to any of the other presets (d-1d-4),  
highlight the destination preset in the thumbnail  
display and press the center of the multi selector  
as described in steps 1–3 on page 61. The menu  
shown at right will be displayed.  
-
d 1  
Set  
OK  
Edit comment  
Select image  
Copy d-0  
Press the multi selector up or down to high-  
light Copy d-0.  
SHOOTING MENU  
White bal.  
White bal. preset  
1
2
-
d 1  
Set  
Edit comment  
Select image  
Copy d-0  
OK  
Press the multi selector to the right to copy  
white balance from d-0 to the selected preset  
and return to the thumbnail display. If com-  
ment has been created for d-0, the comment  
will be copied to the comment for the selected  
preset.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Select Set  
d-0  
d-1  
d-3  
d-2  
d-4  
:
-
d 1  
Nikon Capture 4  
Nikon Capture 4 (available separately) can be used to edit white balance when RAW  
photographs taken with the D2H are displayed on a computer. The edited value can be  
copied directly to a white balance preset while the camera is connected to a computer,  
or the image can be saved to the camera memory card and the white balance value  
copied using the Select image option in the preset menu. Any comments created  
with Nikon Capture 4 will also be copied to the comment for the selected preset.  
64  
Image Adjustment  
Shooting Menu Settings  
This section describes settings that can only be adjusted from the shooting  
menu ( 161).  
Making Edges More Distinct: Image Sharpening  
When a photograph is taken, the camera automatically processes the image  
to increase the distinction between light and dark areas, making the picture  
appear sharper. The Image sharpening menu controls the amount of  
sharpening performed.  
Option  
Description  
The camera automatically adjusts sharpening according to the  
subject and how other camera settings are adjusted. Amount  
of sharpening varies from shot to shot, even in scenes of same  
type; to take multiple shots with same sharpening, choose dif-  
ferent setting. For best results, use a type G or D lens.  
Auto  
(default)  
Normal  
Low  
Camera sharpens all images the same standard amount.  
Images are sharpened less than the standard amount.  
Medium low Images are sharpened slightly less than the standard amount.  
Medium high Images are sharpened slightly more than the standard amount.  
High  
Images are sharpened more than the standard amount.  
Images are not sharpened.  
None  
Highlight Image sharpening in the shooting  
menu ( 168) and press the multi selector to  
the right.  
SHOOTING MENU  
1
2
White bal.  
A
200  
A
ISO  
Image sharpening  
Tone compensation  
Color mode  
Hue adjustment  
Intvl timer shooting  
Non-CPU lens data  
A
I
0°  
OFF  
Highlight the desired option and press the  
multi selector to the right. The shooting menu  
will be displayed.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Image sharpening  
Auto  
Normal  
Low  
OK  
Medium low  
Medium high  
High  
None  
65  
Adjusting Contrast: Tone Compensation  
As photographs are saved to the memory card, they are processed to adjust  
the distribution of tones in the image, enhancing contrast. Tone compen-  
sation is performed by means of tone curves that define the relationship  
between the distribution of tones in the original image and the compensated  
result. The Tone compensation menu controls the type of curve used.  
Option  
Description  
Camera automatically optimizes contrast by selecting the ap-  
propriate curve. Curve varies from shot to shot, even in scenes  
of same type; to take multiple shots with same curve, choose  
different setting. For best results, use a type G or D lens.  
Auto  
(default)  
Camera uses same standard curve for all images. Suited to  
most scenes, whether dark or bright.  
Normal  
Produces “softer” images. Prevents highlights on portrait sub-  
jects from being “washed out” in direct sunlight.  
Less contrast  
More contrast  
Choose this curve to preserve detail in misty landscapes and  
other low-contrast subjects.  
Nikon Capture 4 (available separately) can be used to define a  
custom tone curve and download it to the camera. Choose  
Custom to select this user-defined curve. If no custom curve  
has been created, this option is equivalent to Normal.  
Custom  
Highlight Tone compensation in the shoot-  
ing menu ( 168) and press the multi selector  
to the right.  
SHOOTING MENU  
1
White bal.  
A
200  
A
ISO  
Image sharpening  
Tone compensation  
Color mode  
Hue adjustment  
Intvl timer shooting  
Non-CPU lens data  
A
I
0°  
OFF  
Highlight the desired option and press the  
multi selector to the right. The shooting menu  
will be displayed.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Tone compensation  
2
Auto  
OK  
Normal  
Less contrast  
More contrast  
Custom  
66  
Suiting Colors to a Workflow: Color Mode  
The D2H offers a choice of color modes, which determine the gamut of col-  
ors available for color reproduction. Choose a color mode according to how  
photographs will be processed on leaving the camera.  
Option  
Description  
Choose for portrait shots that will be printed or used “as is,” with  
no further modification. Photographs are adapted to the sRGB  
color space.  
I (sRGB)  
(default)  
Photographs taken at this setting are adapted to the Adobe RGB  
color space. This color space is capable of expressing a wider  
gamut of colors than sRGB, making it the preferred choice for im-  
ages that will be extensively processed or retouched.  
II  
(Adobe RGB)  
Choose for nature or landscape shots that will be printed or used  
“as is,” with no further modification. Photographs are adapted  
to the sRGB color space.  
III (sRGB)  
Color Mode  
Modes I and III are recommended when taking photographs that will be printed with-  
out modification or viewed in applications that do not support color management.  
Modes I and III are also recommended when taking photographs that will be printed  
with ExifPrint, the direct printing option on some household printers, or kiosk printing  
or other commercial print services. Photographs taken in Mode II can also be printed  
using these options, but colors will not be as vivid.  
JPEG photographs taken in Mode II are Exif 2.21 and DCF 2.0 compliant; applications  
and printers that support Exif 2.21 and DCF 2.0 will select the correct color space au-  
tomatically. If the application or device does not support Exif 2.21 and DCF 2.0, select  
the Adobe RGB color space. An ICC color profile is embedded in TIFF photographs  
taken in Mode II, allowing applications that support color management to automati-  
cally select the correct color space. For more information, see the documentation pro-  
vided with the application or device.  
Nikon Software  
When photographs created with the D2H are opened in the software provided with  
the camera or in Nikon Capture 4, the appropriate color space will be selected auto-  
matically.  
67  
Highlight Color mode in the shooting menu  
168) and press the multi selector to the  
right.  
SHOOTING MENU  
1
2
(
White bal.  
A
200  
A
ISO  
Image sharpening  
Tone compensation  
Color mode  
Hue adjustment  
Intvl timer shooting  
Non-CPU lens data  
A
I
0°  
OFF  
Highlight the desired option and press the  
multi selector to the right. The shooting menu  
will be displayed.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Color mode  
(
(
(
)
sRGB  
OK  
)
AdobeRGB  
)
sRGB  
68  
Controlling Color: Hue Adjustment  
Hue can be adjusted in the range about –9° to +9° in increments of 3°. If  
red is taken as the starting color, raising hue above 0° (the default setting)  
would introduce a yellow cast, making colors that would be red at a setting  
of 0° appear increasingly orange. Lowering hue below 0° would introduce  
a blue cast, making colors that would be red at a setting of 0° appear in-  
creasingly purple.  
Highlight Hue adjustment in the shooting  
SHOOTING MENU  
1
2
menu ( 169) and press the multi selector to  
the right.  
White bal.  
A
200  
A
ISO  
Image sharpening  
Tone compensation  
Color mode  
Hue adjustment  
Intvl timer shooting  
Non-CPU lens data  
A
I
0°  
OFF  
Highlight the desired option and press the  
multi selector to the right. The shooting menu  
will be displayed.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Hue adjustment  
OK  
0
Hue  
The RGB color model used in digital photographs reproduces colors using differing  
amounts of red, green, and blue light. By mixing two colors of light, a variety of  
different colors can be produced. For example, red combined with a small amount  
of green light produces orange. If red and green are mixed in equal amounts, yel-  
low results, while a smaller amount of red produces a yellow green. Mixing different  
amounts of red and blue light produces colors ranging from a reddish purple through  
purple to navy, while mixing different amounts of green and blue light produces colors  
ranging from emerald to turquoise. (Adding a third color of light results in lighter hues;  
if all three mixed in equal amounts, the results range from white through gray.) When  
this progression of hues is arranged in a circle, the result is known as a color wheel.  
69  
Choosing a Shooting Mode  
Single Frame, Continuous, Self-Timer, or Mirror Up  
Shooting mode determines how the camera takes photographs: one at a  
time, in a continuous sequence, with a timed shutter-release delay, or with  
the mirror raised to enhance shutter response and minimize vibration.  
To choose a shooting mode, press the mode dial  
lock release and turn the mode dial to the desired  
setting. The following modes are available:  
Mode  
Description  
S
Camera takes one photograph each time shutter-release button is  
pressed. Access lamp will light while photo is recorded; next shot can  
be taken immediately if enough space remains in memory buffer.  
Single  
frame  
CL  
Camera records from one to seven frames per second* while the shut-  
Continuous ter-release button is held down. Frame rate can be chosen using Cus-  
low speed tom Setting d1 (Shooting Speed; 188).  
CH  
While the shutter-release button is held down, camera records up to  
Continuous eight frames per second (seven frames per second when ISO auto is on  
high speed and sensitivity is altered from value selected by user).*  
Use the self-timer for self-portraits or to reduce blurring caused by  
camera shake (  
123).  
Self-timer  
Press shutter-release button once to raise mirror, again to take photo-  
graph (shutter will be released automatically if shutter-release button  
is not pressed for 30s after mirror up). Mirror will be lowered after  
photo is taken. Choose this mode to reduce release lag in situations in  
which timing is paramount, or to minimize camera shake in situations  
in which the least camera movement can result in blurred photographs.  
Note that autofocus, metering, and framing can not be confirmed in the  
viewfinder while mirror is raised.  
M-UP  
Mirror up  
*Average frame rate with continuous-servo AF, manual or shutter-priority auto ex-  
posure, a shutter speed of ½50 s or faster, and memory remaining in memory buffer.  
Buffer can hold up to 24 compressed NEF+JPEG images, 25 uncompressed NEF+JPEG  
images, 25 compressed NEF (RAW) images, 26 uncompressed NEF (RAW) images, 35  
TIFF (RGB) images, or 40 JPEG images. When noise reduction is on, buffer can hold  
up to 14 compressed NEF+JPEG images, 15 uncompressed NEF+JPEG images, 15  
compressed NEF (RAW) images, 16 uncompressed NEF (RAW) images, 15 TIFF (RGB)  
images, or 30 JPEG images. Additional photographs can be taken as soon as enough  
memory is available in buffer.  
70  
The Memory Buffer  
The camera is equipped with a memory buffer for temporary storage, allowing shoot-  
ing to continue while photographs are being saved to the memory card. When the  
buffer is full, the shutter is disabled until enough data have been transferred to the  
memory card to make room for another photograph. In continuous mode, shooting  
will continue as long as the shutter-release button is held down, although the frame  
rate will drop once the buffer has filled.  
While photographs are being recorded to the memory card, the access lamp next to  
the memory card slot will light. Depending on the number of the images in the buf-  
fer, recording may take from a few seconds to a few minutes. Do not remove the  
memory card or remove or disconnect the power source until the access lamp  
has gone out. If the camera is switched off while data remain in the buffer, the power  
will not turn off until all images in the buffer have been recorded to the memory card.  
To turn the camera off without recording the images in the buffer, press the  
button  
while turning the camera off (keep the button pressed for at least one second after  
turning the camera off). If the battery is exhausted while images remain in the buffer,  
the shutter release will be disabled and all images will be transferred to the memory  
card.  
The approximate time required to write the entire buffer to a 512MB Lexar Media 24 ×  
WA USB card is as follows (where applicable, all times are for large images):  
• Compressed NEF (RAW)+JPEG Basic: 32s (24 frames)  
• Compressed NEF (RAW): 26s (25 frames)  
• TIFF RGB: 420s (35 frames)  
• JPEG Fine: 26s (40 frames)  
Buffer Size  
The number of images that can be stored in the memory  
buffer at current settings is shown in the exposure-count  
displays in the viewfinder and top control panel while  
the shutter-release button is pressed.  
d2—Maximum Shots (  
188)  
In continuous mode, Custom Setting d2 (Maximum shots) can be used to limit the  
maximum number of photographs that can be taken in a single burst to any amount  
between one and forty.  
71  
Focus  
Controlling How the Camera Focuses  
This section describes the options that control how your camera focuses:  
focus mode, focus-area selection, and AF-area mode.  
Focus Mode  
Focus mode is controlled by the focus mode  
selector on the front of the camera. There are  
two autofocus (AF) modes, in which the camera  
focuses automatically when the shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway, and one manual focus  
mode, in which focus must be adjusted manually  
using the focusing ring on the lens:  
Option  
Description  
Camera focuses when shutter-release button is pressed halfway. Focus  
locks when in-focus indicator () appears in viewfinder, and remains  
locked while shutter-release button is pressed halfway (focus lock).  
Shutter can only be released when in-focus indicator is displayed (fo-  
cus priority). If subject was moving when shutter-release button was  
pressed halfway, camera will track subject until focusing is complete  
S
Single-servo  
AF  
and the shutter can be released (predictive focus tracking;  
73). If  
subject stops moving before shutter is released, in-focus indicator will  
appear in viewfinder and focus will lock at this distance.  
Camera focuses continuously while shutter-release button is pressed  
halfway. If subject moves, focus will be adjusted to compensate (pre-  
C
Continuous-  
servo AF  
dictive focus tracking;  
73). Photographs can be taken whether or  
not camera is in focus (release priority).  
Camera does not focus automatically; focus must be adjusted manu-  
ally using the lens focusing ring. If maximum aperture of lens is f/5.6  
or faster, viewfinder focus indicator can be used to confirm focus  
(electronic range finding), but photographs can be taken at any time,  
whether or not camera is in focus.  
M
Manual  
Choosing single-servo AF ensures a sharp, focused image. Continuous-servo  
AF may be a better choice with erratically-moving subjects. Manual focus is  
recommended when the camera is unable to focus using autofocus.  
72  
The AF-ON Buttons  
For the purpose of focusing the camera, pressing either of the AF-ON buttons has the  
same effect as pressing the shutter-release button halfway (the AF-ON button for verti-  
cal shooting can only be used when the shutter-release button for vertical shooting is  
unlocked).  
Predictive Focus Tracking  
If the camera autofocus system detects that the subject is moving when the shutter-  
release button is pressed halfway, it will automatically initiate predictive focus tracking.  
If the subject is moving toward or away from the camera, the camera will track focus  
while attempting to predict where the subject will be when the shutter is released. In  
single-servo autofocus, the camera will initiate predictive focus tracking if the subject  
was moving when the shutter-release button was pressed halfway. Focus will lock  
when the subject stops moving. In continuous-servo AF, the camera will also initiate  
predictive focus tracking if the subject starts moving after the shutter-release button is  
pressed halfway. Focus will not lock when the subject stops moving.  
Predictive focus tracking is not available in manual focus mode.  
a1—AF-C Mode Priority (  
176)  
If Focus is selected for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C mode priority), photographs can be  
taken in continuous servo-AF only when the camera is in focus. Select FPS rate+ AF  
for improved focus during continuous shooting.  
a2—AF-S Mode Priority (  
176)  
If Release is selected for Custom Setting a2 (AF-S mode priority), photographs can  
be taken in single servo-AF even when the camera is not in focus.  
a5—AF Activation (  
179)  
If AF-ON only is selected for Custom Setting a5 (AF activation), the camera will only  
focus when one of the AF-ON buttons is pressed, not when the shutter-release button  
is pressed halfway.  
a8—Vertical AF-ON (  
182)  
Custom Setting a8 (Vertical AF-ON) controls whether the AF-ON button for vertical  
shooting is used to initiate autofocus, select the focus area, or both.  
73  
Focus Area Selection  
The D2H offers a choice of eleven focus areas that together cover a wide  
area of the frame. The focus area can be selected manually, allowing pho-  
tographs to be composed the main subject positioned almost anywhere in  
the frame, or automatically to ensure that the subject closest to the camera  
is always in focus regardless of where it is the frame (closest-subject priority;  
76). Group dynamic-AF can be used to focus on the closest subject in a  
selected area of the frame ( 76).  
To select the focus area, rotate the focus selector  
lock. The multi selector can then be used to se-  
lect the focus area. The selected focus area is dis-  
played in the top control panel and is highlighted  
briefly in the viewfinder.  
To select the center focus area or (focus area  
group) at any time, press the center of the multi  
selector.  
The focus selector lock can be rotated to the locked position following se-  
lection to prevent the selected focus area from changing when the multi  
selector is pressed.  
Focus Area Selection  
The focus area can not be changed during playback or while menus are displayed.  
74  
Focus Area Selection for Portrait (Tall) Orientation Photographs  
If the shutter-release button for vertical shooting is un-  
locked, the focus area can also be selected by pressing  
the AF-ON button for vertical shooting and rotating the  
sub-command dial for vertical shooting. The selected  
focus area is displayed in the top control panel and is  
highlighted briefly in the viewfinder.  
Rotate the sub-command dial clockwise to cycle end-  
lessly through focus areas in the order shown at right,  
counter-clockwise to cycle through focus areas in the  
reverse order.  
10  
8
7
6
9
11  
2
1
4
5
3
a6—Focus Area Illum (  
180)  
Custom Setting a6 (Focus area Illum) controls how long the focus area is illuminated  
in the viewfinder after selection and whether focus areas are displayed in manual focus  
mode or continuous shooting mode.  
a7—Focus Area (  
181)  
This option can be used to set focus area selection to “wrap around.”  
a8—Vertical AF-ON ( 182)  
Custom Setting a8 (Vertical AF-ON) controls whether the AF-ON button for vertical  
shooting is used to initiate autofocus, select the focus area, or both.  
f1—Center Button>Shooting Mode (  
198)  
Depending on the option selected for Center button>Shooting mode (Custom Set-  
ting f1), pressing the center of the multi selector will have no effect or will illuminate  
the selected focus area.  
75  
Autofocus  
When the focus mode selector is set to S (single-servo autofocus) or C (con-  
tinuous-servo autofocus), the camera focuses automatically when the shut-  
ter-release button is pressed halfway. This section describes focus options  
that are only available in single- and continuous-servo AF.  
AF-Area Mode  
AF-area mode determines how the focus area is  
selected and what happens if the subject moves  
out of the selected focus area while the camera is  
still focusing. To select the AF-area mode, rotate  
the AF-area mode selector. The selected mode is  
shown by an icon in the top control panel. The  
following options are available:  
Mode  
Icon  
Description  
User selects focus area manually; camera focuses on subject in  
selected focus area only. Use for relatively static compositions  
with subjects that will stay in selected focus area.  
Single-  
area AF  
User selects focus area manually, but camera uses information  
from multiple focus areas to determine focus. If the subject  
leaves selected focus area even briefly, camera will still be able  
to focus based on information from other focus areas (focus  
area selected in viewfinder does not change). Use when fol-  
lowing erratically moving subjects and in other situations in  
which it is difficult to keep subject in selected focus area.  
Dynamic-  
area AF  
User chooses group of focus areas  
in top, left, center, right, or bottom  
area of frame (see right); from this  
group, camera automatically selects  
focus area containing subject clos-  
est to camera. Use when subject  
is moving erratically but place of  
subject in overall composition is  
known.  
Top  
Group  
dynamic-  
AF  
Left Center Right  
Bottom  
76  
Mode  
Icon  
Description  
Camera automatically selects focus area containing subject clos-  
est to camera. Prevents out-of-focus shots when photograph-  
ing erratically moving subjects. Focus area can not be selected  
manually, and focus areas are not displayed in viewfinder or top  
control panel. Camera may be unable to select focus area con-  
taining closest subject when telephoto lens is used or subject is  
poorly lit. Single-area AF is recommended in these cases.  
Dynamic-  
area AF  
with  
closest  
subject  
priority  
Manual Focus  
Single-area AF is automatically selected when manual focus is used.  
The Top Control Panel  
The selected focus area or group of focus areas is shown in the top control panel in  
single-area AF, dynamic-area AF, and group dynamic-AF. The illustrations in the “Icon”  
column show the display when the center focus area or focus area group is selected.  
The top control panel display does not show the focus area selected by the camera for  
group dynamic-AF or dynamic-area AF with closest subject priority.  
a1—AF-C Mode Priority (  
176)  
In focus mode C (continuous-servo autofocus) photographs can be taken even when  
the camera is not in focus (release priority). To ensure that the camera is in focus when  
the picture is taken, choose Focus for Custom Setting a1 (AF-C mode priority). Se-  
lect FPS rate+ AF for improved focus during continuous shooting.  
a2—AF-S Mode Priority (  
176)  
In focus mode S (single-servo autofocus) photographs can be taken only when the  
camera is in focus (focus priority). To allow photographs to be taken regardless of  
whether or not the camera is in focus, choose Release for Custom Setting a2 (AF-S  
mode priority).  
a3—Group Dynamic AF (  
177)  
This option controls how focus areas are grouped in group dynamic-AF mode and  
whether the camera tracks the subject in the center focus area of the selected group.  
a4—Disable Lock-On (  
179)  
This option controls whether the camera immediately adjusts focus to track a subject  
when the distance to the subject changes drastically.  
77  
Summary of Autofocus Options  
Focus  
mode  
AF-area  
mode  
Control-panel  
display  
Active  
focus area  
Focus-area  
selection  
Shown in  
viewfinder  
Single-area AF  
Manual  
Shown in  
viewfinder  
Dynamic-area AF  
Manual  
AF-S  
Camera automatically  
selects focus area  
from within manually  
selected group  
Shown in  
viewfinder  
Group dynamic-AF  
Dynamic-area AF  
with closest-  
subject priority  
Not shown  
Automatic  
Manual  
Shown in  
viewfinder  
Single-area AF  
Shown in  
viewfinder  
Dynamic-area AF  
Manual  
AF-C  
Camera automatically  
selects focus area  
from within manually  
selected group  
Shown in  
viewfinder  
Group dynamic-AF  
Dynamic-area AF  
with closest-  
Not shown  
Automatic  
subject priority  
78  
How it works  
When to use it  
Camera focuses on subject in selected focus area. Use with static subjects when  
Focus will remain locked while shutter-release button time is available to compose  
is pressed halfway.  
photo.  
Camera focuses on subject in selected focus area. If  
subject moves before camera has focused, camera  
will focus based on information from other focus  
areas. Focus will remain locked while shutter-release  
button is pressed halfway.  
Use with static subjects when  
time is available to compose  
photo.  
Use when sure of subjects  
place in overall composition  
but unsure of its exact posi-  
tion.  
As above, except camera automatically selects focus  
area containing subject closest to camera from group  
of focus areas selected by user.  
Use when sure that subject  
will be closest object to cam-  
era but unsure where it will  
appear in final composition.  
As above, except that focus area containing subject  
closest to camera is selected from all eleven focus  
areas.  
Camera continues to focus on subject in selected Use with moving subjects that  
focus area while shutter-release button is pressed can be continuously framed  
halfway.  
in single focus area.  
Camera focuses on subject in selected focus area.  
While shutter-release button is pressed halfway, cam-  
era tracks subject as it moves from one focus area to  
the next.  
Use with subjects that are  
moving unpredictably.  
Use when sure of moving  
subjects place in overall  
composition but unsure of its  
exact position.  
As above, except camera automatically selects focus  
area containing subject closest to camera from group  
of focus areas selected by user.  
Use with erratically moving  
subjects when you know  
subject will be closest object  
to camera.  
As above, except that focus area containing subject  
closest to camera is selected from all eleven focus  
areas.  
79  
Focus Lock  
Focus lock can be used to change the composition after focusing, making it  
possible to focus on a subject that will not be in one of the eleven focus areas  
in the final composition. It can also be used when the autofocus system is  
unable to focus ( 82).  
In single-servo AF, focus locks automatically when the in-focus indicator ()  
appears in the viewfinder. In continuous-servo AF, focus must be locked  
manually using the AE-L/AF-L button. To recompose a photograph using  
focus lock:  
Position the subject in the selected focus area and press the shutter-re-  
1
lease button halfway to initiate focus.  
Check that the in-focus indicator () appears in the viewfinder.  
2
Single-servo AF  
Focus will lock automatically when the in-  
focus indicator appears, and remain locked  
until you remove your finger from the shutter-  
release button. Focus can also be locked by  
pressing the AE-L/AF-L button (see below).  
Continuous-servo AF  
Press the AE-L/AF-L button to lock both focus  
and exposure. Focus will remain locked while  
the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed, even if you  
later remove your finger from the shutter-re-  
lease button.  
80  
Recompose the photograph and shoot.  
3
In single-servo AF, focus will remain locked between shots as long as the  
shutter-release button is kept pressed halfway, allowing several photographs  
in succession to be taken at the same focus setting. Focus will also remain  
locked between shots while the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.  
Do not change the distance between the camera and the subject while focus  
lock is in effect. If the subject moves, focus again at the new distance.  
c2—AE-L/AF-L (  
186)  
This option controls whether the AE-L/AF-L button locks focus and exposure (the  
default setting), focus only, or exposure only.  
81  
Getting Good Results with Autofocus  
Autofocus does not perform well under the conditions listed below. If the  
camera is unable to focus using autofocus, use manual focus ( 83) or use  
focus lock ( 80) to focus on another subject at the same distance and then  
recompose the photograph.  
AF-Assist Illuminators  
If the subject is dark, a Speedlight with an AF-assist illuminator can be used to assist  
the autofocus.  
82  
Manual Focus  
Manual focus is available for lenses that do not  
support autofocus (non-AF Nikkor lenses) or  
when the autofocus does not produce the desired  
results ( 82). To focus manually, set the focus-  
mode selector to M and adjust the lens focusing  
ring until the image displayed on the clear matte  
field in the viewfinder is in focus. Photographs  
can be taken at any time, even when the image  
is not in focus.  
The Electronic Range Finder  
If the lens has a maximum aperture of f/5.6 or  
faster, the viewfinder focus indicator can be used  
to confirm whether the subject in the selected fo-  
cus area is in focus. After positioning the subject  
in the active focus area, press the shutter-release  
button halfway and rotate the lens focusing ring  
until the in-focus indicator () is displayed.  
A-M Selection/Autofocus with Manual Priority  
When using a lens that offers A-M selection, select M when focusing manually. With  
lenses that support M/A (autofocus with manual priority), focus can be adjusted man-  
ually with the lens set to M or M/A. See the documentation provided with your lens  
for details.  
Focal Plane Position  
To determine the distance between your subject and  
the camera, measure from the focal plane mark on the  
camera body. The distance between the lens mounting  
flange and the focal plane is 46.5mm (1.83˝).  
83  
Exposure  
Controlling How the Camera Sets Exposure  
Metering  
Three metering method are available to determine  
how the camera sets exposure. Before shooting,  
press the metering selector lock button and rotate  
the metering selector to choose a method suited  
to the composition and lighting conditions, and  
confirm your selection in the viewfinder.  
Method  
Description  
Metering is performed by 1,005-pixel RGB sensor, which sets exposure  
based on variety of information from all areas of frame. This system dem-  
onstrates its effectiveness most dramatically where bright (white or yellow)  
or dark (black or dark green) colors occupy large area of frame, when its  
results approach what is seen by human eyes. 3D color matrix metering,  
which uses range information from lens in adjusting exposure, is available  
only with type G or D lenses. Color matrix metering, which does not in-  
clude range information, is available with other CPU lenses or when focal  
length and maximum aperture of non-CPU lens are specified using Non-  
CPU lens data item in shooting menu ( 124; center-weighted metering  
is used if focal length or aperture is not specified). Matrix metering will  
3D color  
matrix/  
Color  
matrix  
not produce desired results with autoexposure lock (  
95) or exposure  
compensation ( 97), but is recommended in most other situations.  
Camera meters entire frame but assigns greatest weight to area in center  
of frame 8mm (0.31˝) in diameter, shown by corresponding 8-mm refer-  
ence circle in viewfinder. Classic meter for portraits; recommended when  
Center-  
weighted  
using filters with an exposure factor (filter factor) over 1× (  
233).*  
Camera meters circle 3mm (0.12˝) in diameter (approximately 2% of  
frame). Circle is centered on current focus area (in group dynamic AF, on  
center focus area of current group;  
76), making it possible to meter  
off-center subjects (if non-CPU lens is used or if dynamic-area AF with  
closest subject priority is in effect, camera will meter center focus area).  
Ensures that subject will be correctly exposed, even when background is  
much brighter or darker.*  
Spot  
*For improved precision with non-CPU lenses, specify lens focal length and maximum  
aperture in Non-CPU lens data menu ( 124).  
b6—Center Weight ( 185)  
This option controls the size of the area assigned the greatest weight in center-  
weighted metering.  
84  
Exposure Mode  
Exposure mode determines how the camera sets shutter speed and aperture  
when adjusting exposure. Four modes are available: programmed auto (P),  
shutter-priority auto (S), aperture-priority auto (A), and manual (M).  
CPU Lenses  
When using a CPU lens equipped with an aperture ring, lock the aperture ring at the  
minimum aperture (highest f/-number). At other settings, the shutter release will be  
disabled and a blinking  
will appear in the aperture displays in the top control panel  
and viewfinder. Type G lenses are not equipped with an aperture ring.  
Depth-of-Field Preview  
To preview the effects of aperture, press and hold the  
depth-of-field preview button. The lens will be stopped  
down to the aperture value selected by the camera in  
programmed auto or shutter-priority auto, or the value  
chosen by the user in aperture-priority auto or manual  
exposure mode, allowing depth of field to be previewed in the viewfinder (if the op-  
tional SB-800 Speedlight is attached, a modeling flash will be emitted).  
b1—ISO Auto (  
182)  
When On is selected for Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto), the camera automatically  
varies sensitivity in the range 200–1600 (ISO equivalent) to help ensure optimum expo-  
sure when the limits of the camera exposure metering system are exceeded (exposure  
modes P, S, and A) or optimum exposure can not be achieved at the shutter-speed and  
aperture selected by the user (exposure mode M). When sensitivity is altered from the  
value selected by the user, ISO-AUTO will flash in the rear control panel and a flashing  
ISO-A will be displayed in the viewfinder. In the camera photo information display for  
pictures taken at altered sensitivities, the ISO value will also be displayed in red. Note  
that noise is more likely to appear in photographs taken at higher sensitivities.  
On can not be selected for ISO auto when sensitivity is set to HI-1 or HI-2; similarly,  
HI-1 or HI-2 can not be selected when ISO Auto is on. If a flash is used when ISO  
auto is on, ISO will be fixed at the value selected by the user. If ISO auto is on when  
autoexposure bracketing is selected in exposure mode M, sensitivity will vary around  
the value selected by the user as required by the bracketing program.  
e4—Modeling Flash (  
195)  
If Off is selected for Custom Setting e4 (Modeling flash), the optional SB-800 will not  
emit a modeling flash when the depth-of-field preview button is pressed.  
85  
P: Programmed Auto  
In this mode, the camera automatically adjusts shutter speed and aperture  
according to a built-in program (see below) for optimal exposure in most  
situations. This mode is recommended for snapshots and other situations in  
which you want to leave the camera in charge of shutter speed and aperture.  
Adjustments can be made using flexible program, exposure compensation  
(
97), and auto exposure bracketing ( 98). Programmed auto is only  
available with CPU lenses.  
To take photographs in programmed auto:  
Press the  
button and rotate the main com-  
1
2
mand dial until P is displayed in the viewfinder  
and top control panel.  
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
Non-CPU Lenses  
Exposure mode A (aperture-priority auto) is automatically selected when a non-CPU  
lens is attached. The exposure mode indicator (P) in the top control panel will blink  
and A will be displayed in the viewfinder. For more information, see “Aperture-Priority  
Auto” (  
90).  
Exposure Warning  
If the limits of the exposure metering system are exceeded, one of the following indi-  
cators will be displayed in the control panel and viewfinder:  
Indicator  
Description  
Subject too bright. Use optional Neutral Density (ND) filter or lower sen-  
sitivity (ISO equivalency;  
Subject too dark. Use optional Speedlight or raise sensitivity (ISO equiv-  
alency; 48).  
48).  
86  
Flexible Program  
In programmed auto, different combinations of shutter  
speed and aperture can be selected by rotating the main  
command dial (“flexible program”). All combinations  
produce the same exposure. While flexible program is  
in effect, an asterisk (“*”) appears next to the exposure-  
mode indicator in the top control panel. To restore  
default shutter speed and aperture settings, rotate the main command dial until the  
indicator is no longer displayed. Default settings can also be restored by turning the  
camera off, selecting another exposure mode, performing a two-button reset (  
128), or choosing another setting for Custom Setting b3 (EV step;  
184).  
Exposure Program  
The exposure program for programmed auto is shown in the following graph:  
ISO 200; lens with maximum aperture of f/1.4 and mini-  
mum aperture of f/16 (e.g., AF 50mm f/1.4 D)  
F1  
F1.4  
F2  
F2.8  
F4  
F5.6  
F8  
F11  
F16  
F22  
F32  
8"  
30" 15"  
4" 2" 1"  
2
4
8
15 30 60 125 250 500 1000 2000 4000 8000  
Shutter speed  
The maximum and minimum values for EV vary with sensitivity (ISO equivalency); the  
above graph assumes a sensitivity of ISO 200 equivalent. When matrix metering is  
used, values over 171 3 EV are reduced to 171  
/3 EV.  
/
87  
S: Shutter-Priority Auto  
In shutter-priority auto, you choose the shutter speed while the camera  
automatically selects the aperture that will produce the optimal exposure.  
Shutter speed can be set to values between 30s and 1 8,000 s. Use slow shutter  
speeds to suggest motion by blurring moving objects, high shutter speeds to  
“freeze” motion. Shutter-priority auto is only available with CPU lenses.  
To take photographs in shutter-priority auto:  
Press the  
button and rotate the main com-  
1
mand dial until S is displayed in the viewfinder  
and top control panel.  
Rotate the main command dial to choose the  
desired shutter speed.  
2
3
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
88  
Non-CPU Lenses  
Exposure mode A (aperture-priority auto) is automatically selected when a non-CPU  
lens is attached. The exposure mode indicator (S) in the top control panel will blink  
and A will be displayed in the viewfinder. For more information, see “Aperture-Priority  
Auto” (  
90).  
Changing from Manual to Shutter-Priority Auto  
If you select a shutter speed of  
in manual exposure mode and then select shut-  
ter-priority auto without changing the shutter speed, the  
indicator in the shutter-  
speed display will flash and the shutter can not be released. Rotate the main command  
dial to select a different shutter speed before shooting.  
Exposure Warning  
If the camera is unable to produce the correct exposure at the selected shutter speed,  
the electronic analog exposure display (  
93) in the viewfinder will show the amount  
of under- or over-exposure and one of the following indicators will be displayed in the  
control panel and viewfinder aperture displays:  
Indicator  
Description  
Subject too bright. Choose faster shutter speed or lower sensitivity (ISO  
equivalency;  
Subject too dark. Choose slower shutter speed or higher sensitivity (ISO  
equivalency; 48), or use optional Speedlight.  
48), or use optional Neutral Density (ND) filter.  
Shutter-Speed Lock  
Shutter speed can be locked at the selected setting (  
94).  
b3—EV Step ( 184)  
This option controls whether changes to shutter speed and aperture are made in incre-  
ments equivalent to 1  
3 EV (the default setting), ½ EV, or 1 EV.  
d4—Long Exp. NR ( 190)  
/
To reduce noise at shutter speeds of about ½s or slower, select On for Custom  
Setting d4. Note that this will increase the time needed to process photographs before  
they are saved to the memory card.  
f5—Command Dials>Change Main/Sub (  
202)  
This option can be used to reverse the roles of the command dials so that the sub-com-  
mand dial controls shutter speed, while the main command dial controls aperture.  
89  
A: Aperture-Priority Auto  
In aperture-priority auto, you choose the aperture while the camera auto-  
matically selects the shutter speed that will produce the optimal exposure.  
Small apertures (high f/-numbers) increase depth of field, bringing both the  
main subject and background into focus. Large apertures (low f/-numbers)  
soften background details and let more light into the camera, increasing the  
range of the flash and making photographs less susceptible to blurring.  
To take photographs in aperture-priority auto:  
Press the  
button and rotate the main com-  
1
mand dial until A is displayed in the viewfinder  
and top control panel.  
Rotate the sub-command dial to choose the  
desired aperture.  
2
3
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
90  
Non-CPU Lenses  
If the maximum aperture of the lens has been specified using the Non-CPU lens data  
item in shooting menu ( 124) when a non-CPU lens is attached, the current f/-num-  
ber will be displayed in the viewfinder and top control  
panel, rounded to the nearest full stop. Otherwise the  
aperture displays will show only the number of stops  
(
, with maximum aperture displayed as  
) and the  
f/-number must be read from the lens aperture ring.  
Exposure Warning  
If the camera is unable to produce the correct exposure at the selected aperture, the  
electronic analog exposure display (  
93) in the viewfinder will show the amount of  
under- or over-exposure and one of the following indicators will be displayed in the  
control panel and viewfinder shutter-speed displays:  
Indicator  
Description  
Subject too bright. Choose smaller aperture (larger f/-number) or lower  
sensitivity (ISO equivalency;  
filter.  
48), or use optional Neutral Density (ND)  
Subject too dark. Choose larger aperture (smaller f/-number) or higher  
sensitivity (ISO equivalency; 48), or use optional Speedlight.  
Aperture Lock  
Aperture can be locked at the selected setting (  
94).  
b3—EV Step ( 184)  
This option controls whether changes to shutter speed and aperture are made in incre-  
ments equivalent to 1  
3 EV (the default setting), ½ EV, or 1 EV.  
f5—Command Dials ( 202–203)  
/
Command dials>Change Main/Sub and Command dials>Aperture setting con-  
trol whether aperture is assigned with the main command dial, the sub-command dial,  
or the lens aperture ring. Regardless of the settings chosen, the command dials are  
always used with type G lenses, the lens aperture ring with non-CPU lenses.  
91  
M: Manual  
In manual exposure mode, you control both shutter speed and aperture.  
1
Shutter speed can be set to values between 30s and 8,000 s, or the shutter  
can be held open indefinitely for a long time-exposure (  
). Aperture can  
be set to values between the minimum and maximum values for the lens.  
Using the electronic analog exposure display in the viewfinder, you can adjust  
exposure according to shooting conditions and the task at hand.  
To take photographs in manual exposure mode:  
Press the  
button and rotate the main  
1
2
command dial until M is displayed in the view-  
finder and top control panel.  
Rotate the main command dial to choose a shutter speed, and the sub-  
command dial to set aperture. Check exposure in the electronic analog  
exposure displays (see right), and continue to adjust shutter speed and  
aperture until the desired exposure is achieved.  
Frame a photograph, focus, and shoot.  
3
Long Time-Exposures  
At a shutter speed of  
, the shutter will remain open while the shutter-release  
button is held down. Nikon recommends using a fully-charged EN-EL4 battery or an  
optional EH-6 AC adapter to prevent loss of power while the shutter is open. Note that  
if the shutter is open for more than approximately ½s at any setting, “noise” in the  
form of randomly-spaced, brightly-colored pixels may appear in the final photograph.  
AF Micro Nikkor Lenses  
Provided that an external exposure meter is used, the exposure ratio need only be  
taken into account when the lens aperture ring is used to set aperture.  
92  
Non-CPU Lenses  
If the maximum aperture of the lens has been specified using the Non-CPU lens data  
item in shooting menu ( 124) when a non-CPU lens is attached, the current f/-num-  
ber will be displayed in the viewfinder and top control  
panel, rounded to the nearest full stop. Otherwise the  
aperture displays will show only the number of stops  
(
, with maximum aperture displayed as  
) and the  
f/-number must be read from the lens aperture ring.  
Electronic Analog Exposure Displays  
The electronic analog exposure displays in the top control panel and viewfinder show  
whether the photograph would be under- or over-exposed at current settings. De-  
pending on the option chosen for Custom Setting b3 (EV step), the amount of under-  
1
or over-exposure is shown in increments of  
/
3 EV, ½ EV, or 1 EV. If the limits of the  
exposure metering system are exceeded, the displays will flash.  
“EV step” set to “1/3 step” “EV step” set to “1/2 step” “EV step” set to “1 step”  
Top control  
panel  
View-  
finder  
Top control  
panel  
View-  
finder  
Top control  
panel  
View-  
finder  
Optimal exposure  
Underexposed by 1  
/
3 EV  
Underexposed by ½EV  
Underexposed by 1EV  
Overexposed by more than 3EV*  
*At 1/3 step,  
appears in the viewfinder when overexposure exceeds 2EV.  
b3—EV Step (  
184)  
This option controls whether changes to shutter speed and aperture are made in incre-  
ments equivalent to 1  
/
3 EV (the default setting), ½ EV, or 1 EV.  
d4—Long Exp. NR ( 190)  
To reduce noise at shutter speeds of about ½s or slower, select On for Custom  
Setting d4. Note that this will increase the time needed to process photographs before  
they are saved to the memory card.  
f5—Command Dials (  
202–203)  
Command dials>Change Main/Sub and Command dials>Aperture setting con-  
trol whether aperture is assigned with the main command dial, the sub-command dial,  
or the lens aperture ring. Regardless of the settings chosen, the command dials are  
always used with type G lenses, the lens aperture ring with non-CPU lenses.  
93  
Shutter-Speed and Aperture Lock  
The button can be used to lock shutter speed at the value selected in shut-  
ter-priority auto or manual exposure mode, or to lock aperture at the value  
selected in aperture-priority auto and manual exposure modes. Lock is not  
available in programmed auto.  
Shutter-Speed Lock  
To lock shutter speed at the selected value, press the button and rotate the  
main command dial until shutter-speed lock icons appear in the viewfinder  
and the top control panel.  
To unlock shutter speed, press the  
button and rotate the main command  
dial until the lock icons disappear from the displays.  
Aperture Lock  
To lock aperture at the selected value, press the  
button and rotate the  
sub-command dial until aperture lock icons appear in the viewfinder and the  
top control panel.  
To unlock aperture, press the  
button and rotate the sub-command dial  
until the lock icons disappear from the displays.  
94  
Autoexposure Lock  
When center-weighted metering is used, an area in the center of the frame  
is assigned the greatest weight when determining exposure. Similarly, when  
spot metering is used, exposure is based upon lighting conditions in the se-  
lected focus area. If the subject is not in the metered area when the picture  
is taken, exposure will be based on lighting conditions in the background,  
and the main subject may be under- or over-exposed. To prevent this, use  
autoexposure lock:  
Select center-weighted or spot metering. If  
1
2
using center-weighted metering, select the  
center focus area with the multi selector (  
74).  
Position the subject in the selected focus area and press the shutter-re-  
lease button halfway. With the shutter-release button pressed halfway  
and the subject positioned in the focus area, press the AE-L/AF-L button  
to lock exposure (and focus, except in manual focus mode). Confirm that  
the in-focus indicator () appears in the viewfinder.  
While exposure lock is in effect, an AE-L indicator will appear in the  
viewfinder.  
95  
Keeping the AE-L/AF-L button pressed, recompose the photograph and  
3
shoot.  
Metered Area  
In spot metering, exposure will be locked at the value metered in a 3-mm (0.12˝) circle  
centered on the selected focus area. In center-weighted metering, exposure will be  
locked at the value metered in an 8-mm (0.31˝) circle at the center of the viewfinder.  
Adjusting Shutter Speed and Aperture  
While exposure lock is in effect, the following settings can be changed without altering  
the metered value for exposure:  
Exposure mode  
Programmed auto  
Shutter-priority auto  
Aperture-priority auto  
Settings  
Shutter speed and aperture (flexible program;  
Shutter speed  
87)  
Aperture  
The new values can be confirmed in the viewfinder and control panel. Note that the  
metering method can not be changed while exposure lock is in effect (changes to  
metering take effect when the lock is released).  
c1—AE Lock (  
186)  
If +Release Button is selected for AE lock, exposure will lock when the shutter-re-  
lease button is pressed halfway.  
c2—AE-L/AF-L (  
186)  
Depending on the option selected, the AE-L/AF-L button locks both focus and expo-  
sure (the default setting), only focus, or only exposure. Options are available for keep-  
ing exposure locked until the AE-L/AF-L button is pressed a second time, the shutter is  
released, or exposure meters turn off.  
96  
Exposure Compensation  
To obtain the desired results with certain subject compositions, it may be  
necessary to use exposure compensation to alter exposure from the value  
suggested by the camera. As a rule of thumb, positive compensation may  
be needed when the main subject is darker than the background, negative  
values when the main subject is brighter than the background.  
Pressing the  
button, rotate the main  
1
command dial and confirm exposure com-  
pensation in the top control panel or the  
viewfinder (in the viewfinder, positive values  
are shown by a  
icon, negative values by a  
icon). Exposure compensation can be set  
to values between –5EV (underexposure) and  
+5EV (overexposure) in increments of 1 3 EV.  
0EV (  
button pressed)  
–0.3EV  
At values other than 0, the 0 at the center  
of the electronic analog exposure displays  
will flash and a  
the control panel and viewfinder after you  
release the button. The current value for  
icon will be displayed in  
+2.0EV  
exposure compensation can be confirmed in  
the electronic analog exposure display or by  
pressing the  
button.  
Frame the photograph, focus, and shoot.  
2
Normal exposure can be restored by setting exposure compensation to 0 or  
performing a two button reset ( 128). Exposure compensation is not reset  
when the camera is turned off.  
b4—Exposure Comp. EV (  
184)  
Use this option to set the increments for exposure compensation to ½ or 1EV.  
b5—Exposure Comp. ( 184)  
If desired, exposure compensation can be set without pressing the  
button.  
97  
Bracketing  
The D2H offers three types of bracketing: exposure bracketing, flash brack-  
eting, and white balance bracketing. In exposure bracketing, the camera  
varies exposure compensation with each shot, while in the case of flash  
bracketing, flash level is varied with each shot (i-TTL and auto aperture flash  
control modes only;  
109, 111). Only one photograph is produced each  
time the shutter is released, meaning that several shots (up to nine) are re-  
quired to complete the bracketing sequence. Exposure and flash bracketing  
are recommended in situations in which it is difficult to set exposure and there  
is not enough time to check results and adjust settings with each shot.  
In white balance bracketing, the camera creates multiple images each time  
the shutter is released, each with a different white balance adjustment (  
51). Only one shot is required to complete the bracketing sequence. White  
balance bracketing is recommended when shooting under mixed lighting or  
experimenting with different white balance settings. White balance bracket-  
ing is not available at white-balance settings of  
(Choose color temp.) or  
(preset) or at image qualities of NEF (Raw), NEF+JPEG Fine, NEF+JPEG  
Normal, or NEF+JPEG Basic.  
Exposure and Flash Bracketing  
Select the type of bracketing to be performed  
using Custom Setting e5 (Auto BKT set;  
196). Choose AE & flash to vary both ex-  
posure and flash level (the default setting), AE  
only to vary only exposure, or Flash only to  
vary only flash level.  
CSM MENU  
e5 Auto bracketing set  
1
2
AE & flash  
AE only  
Flash only  
WB bracketing  
OK  
Pressing the  
button, rotate the main command dial to choose the  
number of shots in the bracketing sequence ( 100–102). At settings  
other than zero, a BKT icon and bracketing indicator will be displayed in  
the top control panel, and a BKT icon will appear in the viewfinder.  
98  
Pressing the  
button, rotate the sub-command dial to choose the  
3
4
exposure increment ( 100–102).  
Compose a photograph, focus, and shoot. The camera will vary ex-  
posure and/or flash level shot-by-shot according to the bracketing pro-  
gram selected. Modifications to exposure are added to those made with  
exposure compensation ( 97), making it possible to achieve exposure  
compensation values of more than 5EV.  
While bracketing is in effect, a bracketing progress indicator will be  
displayed in the top control panel. A segment will disappear from the  
indicator after each shot.  
To cancel bracketing, press the  
mand dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero  
and is no longer displayed in the control panel on top of the camera.  
button and rotate the main com-  
The program last in effect will be restored the next time bracketing is  
activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by selecting WB bracketing  
for Custom Setting e5 or by performing a two-button reset ( 128), al-  
though in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next  
time bracketing is activated.  
Shooting Mode  
In single frame and self-timer modes, one shot will be taken each time the shutter-  
release button is pressed. In continuous low speed and continuous high speed modes,  
shooting will pause after the number of shots specified in the bracketing program have  
been taken. Shooting will resume the next time the shutter-release button is pressed.  
e8—Auto BKT Selection (  
198)  
If desired, the main command dial can be used to turn bracketing on and off and the  
sub-command dial to select both the number of shots and the exposure increment.  
99  
The bracketing programs available depend on the option selected for Cus-  
tom Setting b3 (EV step; 184).  
1/3 Step Selected for EV Step  
Control panel  
display  
No. of Exposure  
shots increment  
Bracketing  
order (EVs)  
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
5
5
5
7
7
7
9
9
9
+
+
/
3 EV  
+0.3, 0, +0.7  
+0.7, 0, +1.3  
2
/
3 EV  
+1EV  
+1.0, 0, +2.0  
1
/
3 EV  
–0.3, –0.7, 0  
2
/
3 EV  
–0.7, –1.3, 0  
1EV  
–1.0, –2.0, 0  
1
+
+
/
3 EV  
0, +0.3  
2
/
3 EV  
0, +0.7  
+1EV  
0, +1.0  
1
/
3 EV  
0, –0.3  
2
/
3 EV  
0, –0.7  
1EV  
0, –1.0  
1
/
3 EV  
0, –0.3, +0.3  
2
/
3 EV  
0, –0.7, +0.7  
1EV  
0, –1.0, +1.0  
1
/
3 EV  
0, –0.7, –0.3, +0.3, +0.7  
0, –1.3, –0.7, +0.7, +1.3  
0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0  
0, –1.0, –0.7, –0.3, +0.3, +0.7, +1.0  
0, –2.0, –1.3, –0.7, +0.7, +1.3, +2.0  
0, –3.0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0, +3.0  
0, –1.3, –1.0, –0.7, –0.3, +0.3, +0.7, +1.0, +1.3  
0, –2.7, –2.0, –1.3, –0.7, +0.7, +1.3, +2.0, +2.7  
0, –4.0, –3.0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0, +3.0, +4.0  
2
/
3 EV  
1EV  
1
/
3 EV  
2
/
3 EV  
1EV  
1
/
3 EV  
2
/
3 EV  
1EV  
100  
1/2 Step Selected for EV Step  
Control panel  
display  
No. of Exposure  
shots increment  
Bracketing  
order (EVs)  
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
3
3
5
5
7
7
+½EV  
+1EV  
½EV  
1EV  
+½EV  
+1EV  
½EV  
1EV  
½EV  
1EV  
+0.5, 0, +1.0  
+1.0, 0, +2.0  
–0.5, –1.0, 0  
–1.0, –2.0, 0  
0, +0.5  
0, +1.0  
0, –0.5  
0, –1.0  
0, –0.5, +0.5  
0, –1.0, +1.0  
½EV  
1EV  
0, –1.0, –0.5, +0.5, +1.0  
0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0  
0, –1.5, –1.0, –0.5, +0.5, +1.0, +1.5  
0, –3.0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0, +3.0  
0, –2.0, –1.5, –1.0, –0.5, +0.5, +1.0, +1.5, +2.0  
0, –4.0, –3.0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0, +3.0, +4.0  
½EV  
1EV  
9
9
½EV  
1EV  
101  
1 Step Selected for EV Step  
Control panel  
display  
No. of Exposure  
shots increment  
Bracketing  
order (EVs)  
3
3
2
2
3
5
7
9
+1EV  
1EV  
+1EV  
1EV  
1EV  
+1.0, 0, +2.0  
–1.0, –2.0, 0  
0, +1.0  
0, –1.0  
0, –1.0, +1.0  
1EV  
0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0  
0, –3.0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0, +3.0  
0, –4.0, –3.0, –2.0, –1.0, +1.0, +2.0, +3.0, +4.0  
1EV  
1EV  
Resuming Exposure or Flash Bracketing  
If the memory card fills before all shots in the sequence have been taken, shooting  
can be resumed from the next shot in the sequence after the memory card has been  
replaced or shots have been deleted to make room on the memory card. If the camera  
is turned off before all shots in the sequence have been taken, bracketing will resume  
from the next shot in the sequence when the camera is turned on.  
Exposure Bracketing  
The camera modifies exposure by varying shutter speed and aperture (programmed  
auto), aperture (shutter-priority auto), or shutter speed (aperture-priority auto, manual  
exposure mode). When On is selected for Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto) and no  
Speedlight is attached, the camera will automatically vary sensitivity for optimum ex-  
posure when the limits of the camera exposure system are exceeded in programmed  
auto, shutter-priority auto, or aperture-priority exposure mode. If Custom Setting e5  
(Auto BKT set) is set AE only or to AE & Flash with no Speedlight attached and On  
is selected for Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto), the camera will vary sensitivity without  
varying shutter speed or aperture, regardless of the setting chosen for Custom Setting  
e6 (see below).  
e6—Manual Mode Bkting (  
197)  
This option controls how the camera performs exposure and flash bracketing in man-  
ual exposure mode. Bracketing can be performed by varying flash level together with  
shutter speed and/or aperture, or by varying flash level alone.  
e7—Auto BKT Order (  
197)  
This option can be used to change the bracketing order.  
102  
White Balance Bracketing  
CSM MENU  
e5 Auto bracketing set  
Choose WB bracketing for Custom Setting  
1
2
e5 (Auto BKT set;  
196).  
AE & flash  
AE only  
Flash only  
WB bracketing  
OK  
Pressing the  
button, rotate the main command dial to choose the  
number of shots in the bracketing sequence ( 105). At settings other  
than zero, a icon and bracketing indicator will appear in the top  
control panel. The rear control panel will show and the view-  
finder  
.
If the number of shots in the bracketing pro-  
gram is greater than the number of exposures  
remaining, a flashing icon will appear in the  
top control panel and the frame count and  
number of exposures remaining will flash. A  
flashing  
indicator will appear in the view-  
finder and the shutter release will be disabled.  
Shooting can begin when a new memory card  
is inserted.  
Pressing the  
button, rotate the sub-command dial to choose the  
3
white balance adjustment ( 105). Each increment is roughly equivalent  
to 10 mired.  
103  
Compose a photograph, focus, and shoot. Each shot will be processed  
to create the number of copies specified in the bracketing program, and  
each copy will have a different white balance. Modifications to white  
balance are added to the white balance adjustment made with white  
balance fine-tuning ( 54).  
4
To cancel bracketing, press the  
button and rotate the main command  
dial until the number of shots in the bracketing sequence is zero and  
white-balance bracketing indicators are no longer displayed in the control  
panels and viewfinder. The program last in effect will be restored the next  
time bracketing is activated. Bracketing can also be cancelled by selecting  
NEF (Raw), NEF+JPEG Fine, NEF+JPEG Normal, or NEF+JPEG Basic  
for image quality or by performing a two-button reset ( 128), although  
in this case the bracketing program will not be restored the next time  
bracketing is activated.  
White Balance Bracketing  
White balance bracketing is not available at white-balance settings of  
(Choose  
color temp.) or (preset) or at an image quality of NEF (Raw), NEF+JPEG Fine,  
NEF+JPEG Normal, or NEF+JPEG Basic. Selecting any of these options cancels white  
balance bracketing.  
Shooting Mode  
In single frame and self-timer modes, the number of copies specified in the white  
balance program will be created each time the shutter is released. In continuous low  
speed and continuous high speed modes, only one shot will be taken each time the  
shutter-release button is pressed. Each shot will be processed to create the number of  
copies specified in the bracketing program.  
Turning the Camera Off  
If the camera is turned off while the camera before all photographs in a white-balance  
bracketing sequence have been recorded, the camera will power off only after all pho-  
tographs in the sequence have been recorded. To turn the camera off without record-  
ing the remaining photographs, press the button while turning the camera off (keep  
the  
button pressed for at least one second after turning the camera off).  
e8—Auto BKT Selection ( 198)  
If desired, the main command dial can be used to turn bracketing on and off and the  
sub-command dial to select both the number of shots and the white-balance incre-  
ment.  
104  
The number of shots, white balance (WB) increment, and bracketing order for  
each of the possible white-balance bracketing programs is shown below.  
Control panel  
display  
No. of  
shots increment  
WB  
Bracketing  
order  
3
3
3
3
3
3
2
2
2
2
2
2
3
3
3
5
5
5
7
7
7
9
9
9
+1  
+2  
+3  
–1  
–2  
–3  
+1  
+2  
+3  
–1  
–2  
–3  
1
+1, 0, +2  
+2, 0, +4  
+3, 0, +6  
–1, –2, 0  
–2, –4, 0  
–3, –6, 0  
0, +1  
0, +2  
0, +3  
0, –1  
0, –2  
0, –3  
0, –1, +1  
2
0, –2, +2  
3
0, –3, +3  
1
0, –2, –1, +1, +2  
0, –4, –2, +2, +4  
0, –6, –3, +3, +6  
0, –3, –2, –1, +1, +2, +3  
0, –6, –4, –2, +2, +4, +6  
0, –9, –6, –3, +3, +6, +9  
0, –4, –3, –2, –1, +1, +2, +3, +4  
0, –8, –6, –4, –2, +2, +4, +6, +8  
0, –12, –9, –6, –3, +3, +6, +9, +12  
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
e7—Auto BKT Order (  
197)  
This option can be used to change the bracketing order.  
105  
Flash Photography  
Using Optional Speedlights  
The D2H supports flash photography when an optional Speedlight is mount-  
ed on the cameras accessory shoe. A flash can be used not only when  
natural lighting is inadequate, but also to fill in shadows, illuminate back-lit  
subjects, and even to add a catch light to the eyes of a portrait subject.  
The Creative Lighting System  
When used with an SB-800 Speedlight (available separately), the D2H sup-  
ports the full range of options available with the Nikon Creative Lighting  
System (CLS), including i-TTL flash control, Flash Color Information Commu-  
nication, Auto FP High-Speed Sync, FV Lock, and AF-assist illumination for  
multi-area autofocus. When used with multiple SB-800 flash units, the D2H  
also supports Advanced Wireless Lighting.  
Advanced Wireless Lighting  
Multiple SB-800 flash units can be used to eliminate shadows for a natural  
lighting effect or to light other areas of the frame away from the main sub-  
ject. Flash modes supported include i-TTL flash control, auto aperture, and  
manual. The remote Speedlights can be divided into up to three groups (A,  
B, and C) and each group controlled separately by the master Speedlight  
mounted on the camera. The master Speedlight can be turned off and only  
remote Speedlights used, while flash compensation ( 3EV) and flash control  
(i-TTL, auto aperture, or manual) for the slave units can be controlled re-  
motely. No cables are required.  
Modeling Illumination  
SB-800 Speedlights emit a modeling flash when the camera depth-of-field preview  
button is pressed. This feature can be used with Advanced Wireless Lighting to pre-  
view the total lighting effect achieved with multiple flash units. Modeling illumination  
can be turned off using Custom Setting e4 (Modeling flash;  
195).  
106  
Flash Color Information Communication  
SB-800 flash units can provide the camera information on the color tempera-  
ture of the flash. When white balance for the D2H is set to A (Auto;  
51),  
this allows automatic white-balance adjustment in response to fine variations  
in flash output. This feature can be used with Advanced Wireless Lighting  
and Auto FP High-Speed Sync.  
To prevent white balance from being adjusted in response to color tempera-  
ture variations, select a white balance setting other than A (Auto). Select  
(Flash) for fixed white balance.  
Auto FP High-Speed Sync  
Auto FP High-Speed Sync is activated automatically at shutter speeds faster  
than ½50 s, allowing auto flash control at all shutter speeds up to and includ-  
1
ing 8,000 s (normal sync control is used at shutter speeds slower than ½50 s,  
including  
). As a result, the flash can be used without concern for  
maximum sync speed, even in daylight shots taken at maximum aperture.  
This feature supports Advanced Wireless Lighting.  
To use Auto FP High-Speed Sync, choose 1/250 (FP auto) for Custom Setting  
e1 (Flash sync speed).  
The SB-800  
The Nikon SB-800 is a high performance Speedlight with a guide number of 53/174  
(m/ft, 35-mm zoom head position, ISO 200, 20°C/68°F). It can be powered by four  
AA batteries (five AA batteries when powered by the supplied SD-800 battery pack)  
or by SD-6, SD-7, or SD-8A power sources (available separately). For bounce-flash or  
close-up photography, the flash head can be rotated through 90° above and 7° below  
the horizontal, 180° left, and 90° right. Auto power zoom (24–105mm) ensures that  
the illuminating is adjusted in accord with lens focal length. The built-in wide panel  
can be used for illuminating angles of 14mm and 17mm. The SB-800 is equipped  
with an illuminator to assist in adjusting settings in the dark. Custom settings are avail-  
able for fine-tuning all aspects of flash operation.  
107  
FV Lock  
This feature is used to lock flash output, allowing photographs to be re-  
composed without changing the flash level. This ensures that flash output  
is appropriate to the subject even when the subject is not positioned in the  
center of the frame. Flash output is adjusted automatically for any changes  
in sensitivity (ISO equivalency), aperture, and Speedlight zoom head position.  
FV Lock is available with i-TTL and auto aperture flash control, Advanced  
Wireless Lighting, and Auto FP High-Speed Sync.  
To use FV Lock:  
Select FV Lock or FV Lock/Lens data for Custom Setting f4 (FUNC. but-  
1
2
3
4
ton;  
201).  
Mount an SB-800 Speedlight on the camera accessory shoe.  
Turn the SB-800 on and set the flash mode to TTL or AA (see the SB-800  
instruction manual for details).  
Position the subject in the center of the frame  
and press the shutter-release button halfway  
to focus.  
Press the FUNC. button. The SB-800 will emit a  
monitor preflash to determine the appropriate  
flash level. Flash output will be locked at this  
5
level and FV Lock icons (  
and  
) will  
appear in the control panel and viewfinder.  
Recompose the photograph and press the  
shutter-release button the rest of the way  
down to shoot. If desired, additional pictures  
can be taken without releasing FV Lock.  
6
7
Press the FUNC. button to release FV Lock  
and confirm that the FV Lock icons (  
and  
) are no longer displayed in the control  
panel and viewfinder.  
108  
AF-Assist for Multi-Area AF  
The SB-800 features AF-assist illumination linked to the D2H focus areas,  
allowing autofocus to be used even at night, regardless of the subjects posi-  
tion in the frame. AF-assist illumination can be used in all AF-area modes,  
including single-area AF, dynamic-area AF, group dynamic-AF, and dynamic-  
area AF with closest-subject priority. If the subject is poorly lit, the AF-assist  
illuminator will light automatically when single-servo AF is used in combina-  
tion with an AF-Nikkor lens (if a lens with an angle greater than 35mm is  
used, the illuminator may not light if the focus area at the left or right edge  
of the frame are selected).  
i-TTL Flash Control  
When used with the D2H and set to TTL, the SB-800 automatically uses one  
of the following types of i-TTL flash control:  
Flash control  
Description  
Speedlight emits series of nearly invisible preflashes (monitor pre-  
flashes) immediately before main flash. Preflashes reflected from  
objects in all areas of frame are picked up by five-segment TTL flash  
control sensor or 1,005-pixel RGB sensor and are analyzed in com-  
bination with information from matrix metering system to adjust  
flash output for natural balance between main subject and ambi-  
ent background lighting. When type G or D lens is used, distance  
information is included when calculating flash output. Precision of  
calculation can be increased for non-CPU lenses by providing lens  
i-TTL Balanced  
Fill-Flash for  
Digital SLR  
data (focal length and maximum aperture;  
able when spot metering is used.  
124–127). Not avail-  
Flash output adjusted to ensure main subject is correctly exposed;  
brightness of background is not taken into account. Recommended  
for shots in which main subject is emphasized at expense of back-  
ground details, or when exposure compensation is used. Standard  
i-TTL flash for digital SLR is activated automatically when spot meter-  
ing is selected.  
Standard  
i-TTL Flash for  
Digital SLR  
109  
D-TTL Flash Control  
D-TTL flash control is available when an optional SB-series 80DX, 28DX, or  
50DX Speedlight is mounted on the camera accessory shoe. D-TTL flash con-  
trol is not available with other optional Speedlights. The type of flash control  
depends on the lens attached:  
Lens  
Description  
3D Multi-Sensor Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: Speedlight  
emits a series of nearly invisible preflashes (monitor preflashes) im-  
mediately before main flash. Preflashes reflected from objects in all  
areas of frame are picked up by five-segment TTL flash control sensor  
and analyzed in combination with information from matrix metering  
system to adjust flash output for natural balance between main subject  
and ambient background lighting. Not available when spot metering  
is used.  
Type G or D  
CPU lens  
Multi-Sensor Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR: As above, except  
that distance information is not included in regulating flash output.  
Precision of calculation can be increased for non-CPU lenses by provid-  
Other  
lenses  
ing lens data (focal length and maximum aperture;  
available when spot metering is used.  
124–127). Not  
Standard TTL Flash for Digital SLR: Flash output is adjusted to en-  
sure that main subject is correctly exposed, without taking the back-  
ground into account. Recommended for shots in which main subject  
is emphasized at the expense of background details, or when exposure  
compensation is used. Standard TTL flash for digital SLR is activated  
automatically when spot metering is selected.  
All types  
110  
Compatible Speedlights  
The following Speedlights support TTL flash control:  
Speedlight  
SB-800  
(Advanced  
Wireless  
Lighting)  
SB-80DX  
SB-28DX  
Flash mode/feature  
SB-800  
SB-50DX  
i-TTL1  
D-TTL2  
Auto aperture3  
TTL  
AA  
A
4
Non-TTL auto  
GN Range-priority manual  
Manual  
M
5
FP high-speed sync  
Repeating flash  
REAR  
Rear-curtain sync  
Red-eye reduction  
Flash Color Information  
Communication  
Auto FP High-Speed Sync  
FV Lock  
6
6
AF-assist for multi-area AF  
1 Standard i-TTL for Digital SLR is used when spot metering is selected. When using non-CPU lens with i-TTL Bal-  
anced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR, improved precision can be obtained if lens data are specified in Non-CPU lens  
data menu,  
2 Standard TTL Flash for Digital SLR is used when spot metering is selected. With matrix or center-weighted meter-  
ing, flash control depends on lens type:  
• Type G or D Nikkor (excluding IX Nikkor): 3D Multi Sensor Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR  
• Other Nikkor (excluding AF Nikkor lenses for F3AF): Multi Sensor Balanced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR (when  
using non-CPU lens, specify lens data in Non-CPU lens data menu for improved precision)  
3 Not available with non-CPU lenses unless lens data have been specified using Non-CPU lens data.  
4 Available only if non-CPU lens is used without specifying lens data in Non-CPU lens data menu.  
5 FP high-speed sync must be selected manually.  
6 Available with type G or D Nikkor (excluding IX Nikkor) and AF Nikkor (excluding AF Nikkor lenses for F3AF) CPU  
lenses only.  
111  
The following Speedlights can be used in non-TTL auto and manual modes.  
If they are set to TTL, the camera shutter-release button will lock and no  
photographs can be taken.  
Speedlight  
SB-30  
SB-22S  
SB-22  
SB-20  
SB-233  
SB-293  
SB-28  
SB-21B3 SB-16B SB-114  
Flash mode  
SB-261 SB-272 SB-25 SB-24 SB-29S3 SB-15 SB-144  
A
Non-TTL auto  
Manual  
M
5
5
FP high-speed sync  
Repeating flash  
REAR Rear-curtain sync  
Red-eye reduction  
1 The SB-26 can be set to slave mode for wireless slave flash photography. When the wireless slave selector is set  
to D, shutter speed will be set to under ½00 s.  
2 When an SB-27 is mounted on the D2H, the flash mode is automatically set to TTL, and the shutter-release will  
be disabled. Set the SB-27 to A (non-TTL auto flash).  
3 Autofocus is only available with AF-Micro lenses (60mm, 105mm, 200mm, or 70–180mm).  
4 When using the SB-11 or SB-14 in A or M mode, use the SU-2 with an SC-13 sync cable. Although SC-11 and  
SC-15 sync cables can be used, the flash-ready indicator will not appear in the viewfinder and shutter speed will  
not be adjusted automatically.  
5 FP high-speed sync must be selected manually.  
Use Only Nikon Flash Accessories  
Use only Nikon Speedlights. Negative voltages or voltages over 250V applied to the  
accessory shoe could not only prevent normal operation, but damage the sync circuitry  
of the camera or flash. Before using a Nikon Speedlight not included in the list on  
these pages, contact a Nikon-authorized service representative for more information.  
ISO Auto  
If a Speedlight is used when Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto) is on, sensitivity (ISO equiv-  
alency) will be fixed at the value selected by the user.  
112  
Flash Sync Modes  
The D2H supports the following flash sync modes:  
Flash sync mode  
Description  
This mode is recommended for most situations. In pro-  
grammed auto and aperture-priority auto modes, shutter  
1
speed will automatically be set to values between /60 and  
½50 s (1/60 to 1/8,000 s with Auto FP High-Speed Sync).  
Front-curtain sync  
Flash is combined with speeds as slow as 30s to capture  
both subject and background at night or under dim light.  
This mode is only available in programmed auto and aper-  
ture-priority auto exposure modes. Use of tripod is recom-  
mended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake.  
Slow sync  
In shutter-priority auto or manual exposure mode, flash fires  
just before the shutter closes, creating effect of a stream  
of light behind moving objects. In programmed auto and  
aperture-priority auto, slow rear-curtain sync is used to cap-  
ture both subject and background. Use of tripod is recom-  
mended to prevent blurring caused by camera shake.  
Rear-curtain sync  
Slow rear-curtain sync  
In this mode (available only with SB-series 800, 80DX, 28DX,  
28, 27, 26, and 25 Speedlights), red-eye reduction pre-flash  
lights for approximately one second before main flash. Pu-  
pils in subjects eyes to contract, reducing “red-eye” effect  
sometimes caused by flash.  
Red-eye reduction  
Combines red-eye reduction with slow sync. This mode is  
only available with SB-series 800, 80DX, 28DX, 28, 27, 26,  
and 25 Speedlights in programmed auto and aperture-prior-  
ity auto exposure modes. Use of a tripod is recommended to  
prevent blurring caused by camera shake.  
Red-eye reduction  
with slow sync  
SB-Series 26, 25, and 24 Speedlights  
Front- and rear-curtain sync modes for SB-series 26, 25, and 24 Speedlights are set  
using the sync mode selector on the optional Speedlight. Camera red-eye reduction  
settings take priority over mode selected with SB-26.  
Studio Flash Systems  
Rear-curtain sync can not be used with studio flash systems, as the correct synchro-  
nization can not be obtained.  
113  
To choose the flash sync mode, press the  
but-  
ton and rotate the main command dial until the  
desired flash sync mode is selected in the top  
control panel:  
1Slow sync is available only in programmed auto and aperture-priority auto exposure  
modes. In shutter-priority auto and manual exposure modes, (front-curtain sync)  
will be selected when the button is released.  
2In programmed auto and aperture-priority auto exposure modes, flash-sync mode  
will be set to (slow rear-curtain sync) when the button is released.  
3If the Speedlight does not support red-eye reduction, the  
mode display will blink.  
icon in the flash sync  
4Red-eye reduction with slow sync is available only in programmed auto and aperture-  
priority auto exposure modes. In shutter-priority auto and manual exposure modes,  
(red-eye reduction) will be selected when the button is released.  
114  
Shutter Speed and Aperture  
The following table lists values that can be chosen for shutter speed and aperture  
when an optional Speedlight is used:  
Exposure mode  
Shutter speed  
Aperture  
Programmed auto Set automatically by camera*  
86  
88  
90  
92  
Set automatically  
by camera  
Shutter-priority auto  
Aperture-priority auto Set automatically by camera*  
½50 s–30s†  
Value selected by  
user‡  
Manual  
½50 s–30s†  
*Shutter speeds are set automatically in the range ½50 s–1/60 s, or ½50 s–30s at flash  
sync settings of slow sync, slow rear-curtain sync, and red-eye reduction with slow  
sync. If 1/250 (FP auto) is selected for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed) when  
an optional SB-800 Speedlight is used, shutter speeds may be as fast as 1/8,000 s.  
If 1/250 (FP auto) is selected for Custom Setting e1 (Flash sync speed) when an  
optional SB-800 Speedlight is used, shutter speeds may be as fast as 1/8,000 s.  
Flash range varies with aperture. When setting aperture in aperture-priority auto and  
manual exposure modes, consult the table of flash ranges provided with optional  
Speedlight.  
ISO Auto  
If a Speedlight is used when Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto) is on, sensitivity (ISO equiv-  
alency) will be fixed at the value selected by the user.  
e1—Flash Sync Speed (  
194)  
This option can be used to enable Auto FP High-Speed Sync or limit the fastest sync  
speed to a speed slower than ½50 s. To x shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shut-  
ter-priority auto or manual exposure modes, select next the shutter speed after the  
slowest possible shutter speed (30s or  
indicator in the top control panel.  
). An X will be displayed in the flash sync  
e2—Flash Shutter Speed (  
194)  
This option can be used to limit the slowest shutter speed possible when using an op-  
tional Speedlight in programmed auto and aperture-priority auto exposure modes.  
115  
Notes on Optional Speedlights  
Refer to the Speedlight manual for detailed instructions. If the Speedlight supports  
i-TTL or D-TTL flash control, refer to the entry for digital SLR cameras in the table of  
camera types.  
If Auto FP High-Speed Sync is not used, the shutter will synchronize with an external  
flash at speeds of ½50 s or slower.  
If the flash-ready indicator blinks for about three seconds after a photograph is taken  
with i-TTL or D-TTL flash control, the photograph may be underexposed.  
The SB-28DX displays exposure in increments of 1/3 EV. If the camera is set to control  
exposure in increments of ½EV using Custom Setting b2, the SB-28DX exposure dis-  
play will not show the correct ISO value. The actual exposure value is not affected.  
i-TTL and D-TTL flash control can be used to adjust flash output at sensitivity (ISO  
equivalency) settings between 200 and 1600. At settings of HI-1 and HI-2, the desired  
results may not be achieved at some ranges or aperture settings.  
The AF-assist illuminator on SB-series 80DX, 28DX, 28, 27, 26, and 24 Speedlights will  
only light if all of the following conditions are met: focus mode is set to single-servo  
auto, an AF-Nikkor lens is used, the subject is poorly lit, and the center focus area is  
selected or dynamic-area AF is used in combination with closest-subject priority.  
In programmed auto, the maximum aperture (minimum f/-number) is limited ac-  
cording to sensitivity (ISO equivalency), as shown below:  
Maximum aperture at an ISO equivalent of:  
200  
250  
320  
400  
500  
640  
800  
1000  
1250  
1600  
4
4.2  
4.5  
4.8  
5
5.3  
5.6  
6
6.3  
6.7  
For each one-step increase in sensitivity (e.g., from 200 to 400), aperture is stopped  
down by half an f/-stop. If the maximum aperture of the lens is smaller than given  
above, the maximum value for aperture will be the maximum aperture of the lens.  
When an SC-series 17, 28, or 29 sync cable is used for off-camera flash photography,  
correct exposure may not be achieved in i-TTL or D-TTL mode. We recommend that  
you choose spot metering to select standard i-TTL or D-TTL flash control. Take a test  
shot and view the results in the monitor.  
In i-TTL or D-TTL mode, use the flash panel provided with your Speedlight. Do not use  
other panels such as diffusion panels, as this may produce incorrect exposure.  
D-TTL flash control can not be used for multi-flash photography.  
116  
Flash Contacts and Indicators  
The D2H is equipped with an accessory shoe for attaching Speedlights direct-  
ly to the camera and a sync terminal that allows Speedlights to be connected  
via a sync cable. When a Speedlight is connected, the flash-ready indicator in  
the viewfinder shows whether the flash is fully charged and ready for use.  
The Accessory Shoe  
SB-series Speedlights, including the SB-800,  
80DX, 28DX, 50DX, 27, 23, 22s, and 29s, can  
be mounted directly on the camera accessory  
shoe without a sync cable. The accessory shoe is  
equipped with a safety lock for Speedlights with a  
locking pin (e.g., SB-series 80DX and 27).  
The Sync Terminal  
A sync cable can be connected to the sync  
terminal as required. Do not connect another  
Speedlight via a sync cable when performing rear-  
curtain sync flash photography with an SB-series  
Speedlights such as the 800, 80DX, 28DX, 50DX,  
27, 23, 22s, or 29s mounted on the camera ac-  
cessory shoe.  
The Flash-Ready Indicator  
When an SB-series Speedlight such as the 800, 80DX, 28DX, 50DX, 27, 23,  
22s, or 29s is connected, the flash-ready indicator will light when the flash  
is fully charged and ready for use. If the indicator blinks for approximately  
three seconds after a photograph is taken in i-TTL or D-TTL modes, the flash  
has fired at full output and the photograph may be underexposed. Check  
the results in the monitor. If the photograph is underexposed, adjust the  
distance to the subject, aperture, or flash range and try again.  
117  
Interval Timer Photography  
Taking Photographs at Preset Intervals  
The D2H is equipped to take photographs automatically at preset intervals.  
Highlight Intvl timer shooting in the shoot-  
ing menu ( 169) and press the multi selector  
to the right.  
SHOOTING MENU  
White bal.  
A
200  
A
1
2
ISO  
Image sharpening  
Tone compensation  
Color mode  
A
I
Hue adjustment  
Intvl timer shooting  
Non-CPU lens data  
0°  
OFF  
Press the multi selector left or right to high-  
light options and press the multi selector up or  
down to change interval timer settings. The  
selected option is highlighted in blue. The fol-  
lowing options are available:  
SHOOTING MENU  
Intvl timer shooting  
Status  
Start  
---  
Now  
Start time  
Current time  
Start time  
Interval  
10 19  
-- --  
00 01 00  
Option  
Description  
Choose starting for interval timer photography from:  
Now: Shooting begins about 3s after this option is selected  
Start time: Shooting begins at Start time  
Start  
Enter start time for interval timer photography when Start time  
is selected for Start. Press multi selector left or right to highlight  
starting hour or minute, press up or down to change. Not avail-  
able when Now is selected for Start.  
Start time  
Interval  
Enter time between shots. Press multi selector left or right to  
highlight hour, minute, or second, press up or down to change.  
Choose number of intervals and number of shots taken at each  
interval. Press multi selector left or right to highlight number of  
intervals or number of shots, press up or down to change. Total  
number of shots that will be taken appears to right.  
Select  
intvl*no. of  
shots  
Shows number of intervals and total shots remaining in current  
interval program. This item can not be edited.  
Remaining  
(intvl*shots)  
Choose Off to exit without starting interval timer. To start inter-  
val timer, select On and press . Shooting will start at selected  
start time and will continue for specified number of intervals.  
Start  
118  
After highlighting Start at the bottom of the interval timer menu and  
pressing the multi selector up or down to select On, press the but-  
ton. The first series of shots will be taken at the specified starting time.  
Shooting will continue at the selected interval until all shots have been  
taken. If interval timer photography can not proceed at current settings  
3
(for example, if a shutter speed of  
is currently selected in manual  
exposure mode, or the starting time is less than one minute from the  
current time) a warning will appear and the interval timer menu will be  
displayed again.  
Use of a tripod is recommended.  
Take a Test Shot  
Before beginning interval timer photography, take a test shot at current settings and  
view the results in the monitor. Remember that the camera will focus before each  
shot—no shots will be taken if the camera is unable to focus in single-servo AF.  
Use a Reliable Power Source  
To ensure that shooting is not interrupted, be sure the battery is fully charged. If in  
doubt, charge the battery before shooting or use an optional EH-6 AC adapter.  
Check the Time  
Before choosing a starting time, select Date in the setup menu and make sure that the  
camera clock is set to the correct time and date (  
19).  
Out of Memory  
If the memory card is full, the interval timer will remain active but no pictures will be  
taken. Delete some pictures or turn the camera off and insert another memory card.  
When the camera is turned on, interval timer photography will be paused. See “Paus-  
ing Interval Timer Photography” on the following page for information on resuming  
interval timer photography.  
Bracketing  
Adjust bracketing settings before starting interval timer photography. If exposure  
and/or flash bracketing is active while interval timer photography is in effect, the cam-  
era will take the number of shots in the bracketing program at each interval, regardless  
of the number of shots specified in the interval timer menu. If white balance brack-  
eting is active while interval timer photography is in effect, the camera will take the  
number of shots specified in the interval timer menu and process each shot to create  
the number of copies specified in the bracketing program.  
119  
During Shooting  
During interval timer photography, the  
icon in the top control panel will blink. Imme-  
diately before the next shooting interval begins,  
the shutter speed display will show the number  
of intervals remaining, and the aperture display  
will show the number of shots remaining in the  
current interval. At other times, the number of intervals remaining and the  
number of shots in each interval can be viewed by pressing the shutter-re-  
lease button halfway (once the button is released, the shutter speed and  
aperture will be displayed until the exposure meters turn off).  
To view current interval timer settings, select Intvl  
timer shooting between shots. While interval  
timer photography is in progress, the interval tim-  
er menu will show the starting time, the current  
time, the shooting interval, the selected number  
of intervals and number of shots, and the number  
of intervals and shots remaining. None of these  
items can be changed while interval timer pho-  
tography is in progress.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Intvl timer shooting  
Status  
Start  
IN PROGRESS  
Now  
Start time  
Current time  
Start time  
Interval  
10 30  
-- --  
00 30 00  
During Shooting  
Shooting and menu settings can be adjusted freely while interval timer photography is  
in progress. Note the following:  
• Performing a two-button reset (  
cancel interval timer photography.  
128) or changing bracketing settings (  
98) will  
• No photographs will be taken if interval timer shooting begins while the user is mea-  
suring a value for preset white balance.  
• If shutter speed is set to  
(manual exposure mode) after the timer has started,  
subsequent photographs will be taken at a shutter speed of 1/3 s.  
• The monitor will turn off about four seconds before each interval.  
• If voice memos are recorded automatically after shooting, voice memos will end two  
seconds before the next photograph is taken.  
C-Mode Max. Shots  
If the number of shots per interval is greater than the limit specified in Custom Setting  
d2 (C-Mode max. shots), only the number of shots specified in Custom Setting d2  
will be taken at each interval.  
120  
Pausing Interval Timer Photography  
To pause interval timer photography:  
Press the multi selector left or right to high-  
light Start at the bottom of the interval timer  
menu.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Intvl timer shooting  
1
Select intvl*no. of shots  
010x3=0030  
Remaining (intvl*shots)  
010x3=0030  
Start  
Off  
On  
Press the multi selector up or down to select  
SHOOTING MENU  
Intvl timer shooting  
2
Pause and press the  
button.  
Select intvl*no. of shots  
010x3=0030  
Remaining (intvl*shots)  
010x3=0030  
Pause  
Done  
Interval time photography can also be paused by:  
• Pressing the  
button between intervals.  
Turning the camera off (if desired, the memory  
card can be replaced while the camera is off).  
Interval timer photography will be paused  
when the camera is turned on.  
Start  
When shooting is paused, the start time will be reset to Now. A new starting  
time can be selected as described in Step 2 of “Interval Timer Photography”  
(
118). The interval, number of intervals, and number of shots can not be  
changed. If interval timer photography is paused during shooting, any shots  
remaining in the current interval will be cancelled.  
Press the multi selector left or right to highlight Start at the bottom of  
1
2
the interval timer menu (see above).  
Press the multi selector up or down to select Resume and press the  
button.  
No Photograph  
Photographs will not be taken if:  
• The self-timer is in operation or the previous photograph has yet to be taken  
• The memory buffer or memory card is full  
• The camera is unable to focus in single-servo AF (note that the camera focuses again  
before each shot)  
• The user is measuring a value for preset white balance or taking a reference photo  
for Image Dust Off using the Dust Off ref photo item in the setup menu.  
121  
Interrupting Interval Timer Photography  
To interrupt interval timer photography:  
Press the multi selector left or right to highlight Start at the bottom of  
1
2
the interval timer menu (see opposite).  
Press the multi selector up or down to select Done and press the  
ton.  
but-  
Interval timer photography will also be interrupted if:  
• A two button reset is performed ( 128).  
• Another shooting bank is selected ( 162).  
Reset shooting menu is selected in the shooting menu ( 164).  
• Bracketing settings are changed ( 98).  
• The battery is exhausted.  
• The clock battery is exhausted.  
• The camera is connected to a computer.  
Normal shooting will resume when interval timer photography ends.  
Shooting Mode  
Regardless of the shooting mode selected, the camera will take the specified number  
of shots at each interval. In CH (continuous high speed) mode, photographs will be  
taken at a rate of eight shots per second. In S (single frame), CL (continuous low-  
speed), and M-UP (mirror up) modes, photographs will be taken at the rate chosen for  
Custom Setting d1 (Shooting speed;  
188). In  
(self-timer) mode, the shutter-  
release delay applies to each photograph taken.  
In M-UP mode, the mirror will be raised automatically immediately before each shot. If  
the shutter-release button is pressed between photographs, the mirror will be raised  
and will remain raised until the next photograph is taken.  
Shooting Menu Banks  
Changes to interval timer settings apply to all shooting menu banks ( 162). If shoot-  
ing menu settings are reset using the Reset shooting menu item in the shooting  
menu (  
164), interval timer settings will be reset as follows:  
• Start time: Now  
• Interval: 00:01´:00˝  
• Number of intervals: 1  
• Number of shots: 1  
• Start: Off  
122  
Self-Timer Mode  
Delaying Shutter Release  
The self-timer can be used to reduce camera shake or for self-portraits. To  
use the self-timer:  
Mount the camera on a tripod (recommended) or place the camera on a  
1
2
stable, level surface.  
Press the shooting mode dial lock release and  
rotate the shooting mode dial to select  
(self-timer mode).  
Frame the photograph and focus. If autofo-  
cus is in effect, be sure not to block the lens  
when activating the self-timer. In single-servo  
3
autofocus (  
72), photographs can only be  
taken if the in-focus () indicator appears in  
the viewfinder.  
Close the Viewfinder Eyepiece Shutter  
To ensure correct exposure in exposure modes other than manual, close  
the viewfinder eyepiece shutter after focusing. This will prevent light  
entering via the viewfinder from interfering with the autoexposure op-  
eration.  
Press the shutter-release button all the way down to start the self-timer.  
The self-timer lamp will start to blink, stopping two seconds before the  
photograph is taken.  
4
To turn the self-timer off before a photograph is taken, turn the mode dial  
to another setting.  
In self-timer mode, a shutter speed of  
c4—Self-timer ( 187)  
Self-timer delay can be set to 2s, 5s, 10s (the default setting), or 20s.  
is equivalent to approximately 1/3 s.  
123  
Non-CPU Lenses  
Specifying Lens Data  
By specifying lens data (lens focal length and maximum aperture), the user  
can gain access to a variety of CPU lens functions when using a non-CPU  
lens. If the focal length of the lens is known:  
• Automatic power zoom can be used with attached Speedlights  
• Lens focal length is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info dis-  
play  
When the maximum aperture of the lens is known:  
• The aperture value is displayed in the top control panel and viewfinder  
• Flash level is adjusted for changes in aperture  
• Aperture is listed (with an asterisk) in the playback photo info display  
Specifying both the focal length and maximum aperture of the lens:  
• Enables color matrix metering (note that it may be necessary to use center-  
weighted or spot metering to achieve accurate results with some lenses,  
including Reflex-Nikkor lenses)  
• Improves the precision of center-weighted and spot metering, i-TTL Bal-  
anced Fill-Flash for Digital SLR, and Multi-Sensor Balanced Fill-Flash for  
Digital SLR  
Specifying Lens Focal Length  
Lens focal length can be specified using the Non-CPU lens data option in  
the shooting menu or by pressing the FUNC. button and rotating the main  
command dial. The following settings are available:  
• 6–45mm: 6, 8, 13, 15, 16, 18, 20, 24, 25, 28, 35, 43, and 45mm  
• 50–180mm: 50, 55, 58, 70, 80, 85, 86, 100, 105, 135, and 180mm  
• 200–4000mm: 200, 300, 360, 400, 500, 600, 800, 1000, 1200, 1400,  
1600, 2000, 2400, 2800, 3200, and 4000mm  
The Non-CPU Lens Data Menu  
Highlight Non-CPU lens data in the shooting  
menu ( 169) and press the multi selector to  
the right.  
SHOOTING MENU  
White bal.  
A
200  
A
1
ISO  
Image sharpening  
Tone compensation  
Color mode  
A
I
Hue adjustment  
Intvl timer shooting  
Non-CPU lens data  
0°  
OFF  
124  
Highlight Focal length and press the multi  
selector to the right.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Non-CPU lens data  
2
3
4
Focal length  
Maximum aperture  
Select the group to which the lens belongs  
from 6-45, 50-180, 200-4000 and press the  
multi selector to the right.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Focal length  
N/A  
6
– 45  
50 – 180  
200 – 4000  
Select the lens focal length (in mm) and press  
the multi selector to the right.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Focal length  
6
8
13  
15  
16  
18  
20  
OK  
Focal Length Not Listed  
If the correct focal length is not listed, choose the closest value greater than the actual  
focal length of the lens.  
Zoom Lenses  
Lens data are not adjusted when non-CPU lenses are zoomed in or out. After changing  
the zoom position, select new values for lens focal length and maximum aperture.  
Default Maximum Aperture  
Selecting a focal length sets Maximum aperture the last value selected at that focal  
length.  
125  
The Function Button  
Select FV Lock/Lens data for Custom Setting  
CSM MENU  
f4 Assign FUNC. Button  
1
2
f4 (FUNC. Button;  
201).  
FV Lock  
FV Lock/Lens data OK  
1 step spd/apeture  
Same as AE-L/AF-L  
Flash off  
Bracketing burst  
Press the FUNC. button and rotate the main  
command dial. Focal length is displayed in  
the top control panel:  
Specifying Maximum Aperture  
Lens maximum aperture can be specified using the Non-CPU lens data op-  
tion in the shooting menu or by pressing the FUNC. button and rotating the  
sub-command dial. The following f/-numbers are available:  
• 1.2, 1.4, 1.8, 2, 2.5, 2.8, 3.3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5, 5.6, 6.3, 7.1, 8, 9.5, 11, 13,15,  
16, 19, 22  
The Non-CPU Lens Data Menu  
Highlight Non-CPU lens data in the shooting  
SHOOTING MENU  
White bal.  
A
200  
A
1
menu ( 169) and press the multi selector to  
the right.  
ISO  
Image sharpening  
Tone compensation  
Color mode  
Hue adjustment  
Intvl timer shooting  
Non-CPU lens data  
A
I
0°  
OFF  
126  
Highlight Maximum aperture and press the  
multi selector to the right.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Non-CPU lens data  
2
3
Focal length  
Maximum aperture  
Select the f/-number corresponding to the  
maximum lens aperture and press the multi  
selector to the right.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Maximum aperture  
N/A  
1.2  
1.4  
1.8  
2
2.5  
2.8  
OK  
The Function Button  
Select FV Lock/Lens data for Custom Setting  
CSM MENU  
f4 Assign FUNC. Button  
1
2
f4 (FUNC. Button;  
201).  
FV Lock  
FV Lock/Lens data OK  
1 step spd/apeture  
Same as AE-L/AF-L  
Flash off  
Bracketing burst  
Press the FUNC. button and rotate the sub-  
command dial. Maximum aperture is dis-  
played in the top control panel:  
SB-800  
If an SB-800 Speedlight is mounted on the camera, turn the Speedlight off before us-  
ing the Function button to specify lens data.  
127  
Two-Button Reset  
Restoring Default Settings  
The camera settings listed below can be restored  
to default values by holding the WB and ISO but-  
tons down together for more than two seconds  
(these buttons are marked by a green dot). Cus-  
tom Settings are not affected.  
Option  
Default  
Center*  
Option  
Default  
Focus area  
Aperture lock  
Shutter-speed lock  
Bracketing  
Off  
Exposure mode  
Flexible program  
Programmed auto  
Off  
Off  
Off‡  
Front-curtain sync  
Off  
Exposure  
compensation  
Flash sync mode  
LCD illuminators  
0
AE hold  
Off†  
Number of shots is reset to zero.  
*If AF-area mode is set to group dynamic- Bracketing increment is reset to 0.3EV  
AF, center group will be selected. (exposure/flash bracketing) or 1 (white  
Custom Setting c2 (AE-L/AF-L) is unaf- balance bracketing).  
fected.  
The following shooting-menu options will also be reset. Only settings in the  
bank currently selected using the Shooting menu bank option will be reset  
(
162). Settings in the remaining banks are unaffected.  
Option  
Default  
JPEG Normal  
Large  
Option  
White bal.  
ISO  
Default  
Auto*  
200  
Image quality  
Image size  
*Fine tuning reset to 0.  
Reset Shooting Menu (  
164)  
Other shooting menu options for the current shooting menu bank can be reset by  
selecting Yes for the Reset shooting menu option in the shooting menu.  
R—Menu Reset (  
174)  
Custom Settings for the current custom settings bank can be restored to default values  
by selecting Yes for Custom Setting R (Menu Reset).  
128  
More About  
Playback  
Playback Options  
This section details the operations that can be  
performed during playback, including thumbnail  
playback, playback zoom, and photo information  
display.  
129  
Single-Image Playback  
To play photographs back, press the button. The most recent photograph  
will be displayed in the monitor.  
100-1  
To end playback and return to shooting mode, press the  
button or press  
the shutter-release button halfway. To view camera menus ( 148), press  
the button.  
130  
Using the Multi Selector  
The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector  
lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.  
Image Review (  
159)  
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu, photographs are auto-  
matically displayed in the monitor as they are being recorded to the memory card. In  
single-frame, self-timer, and mirror-up modes, photographs are displayed one at a time  
as they are taken. In continuous shooting mode, display begins when shooting ends,  
with the first photograph in the current series displayed. Playback will be interrupted  
when the shutter-release button is pressed, and resume when the button is released  
after shooting.  
c5—Monitor Off (  
187)  
The monitor will turn off automatically to save power if no operations are performed  
for the time specified in Custom Setting c5 (Monitor off). Press the  
button again  
to return to playback mode.  
131  
Photo Information  
Photo information is superimposed on images displayed in single-image play-  
back. Depending on the option selected for Display mode in the playback  
menu ( 159), there are up to seven pages of information for each photo.  
Press the multi-selector left or right to cycle through photo information as  
follows: (Page 4)(Page 3)Page 2Page 1 (Page 5) (Page 6) ↔  
(Page 4).  
Page 1  
1 Voice memo icon...141  
1
2
3 Folder number/frame  
2 Protect status.........137  
number .................150  
100-1  
3
Page 2  
1
2
3
4
1 Voice memo icon...141  
2 Protect status.........137  
3 Focus brackets* ........74  
4 Frame number/total  
7 Image size ...............44  
8 Image quality...........41  
9 Date of recording.....19  
10 Time of recording ....19  
1/6  
number of frames..150 11 Folder number/frame  
5
6
7
8
5 File name.................42  
number .................150  
100NCD2H/DSC_0001.JPG  
:
:
100-1  
2003/08/30 15 45 36  
6 Folder name ..........150  
9 10  
11  
*If Focus area is selected for Display mode in playback menu (  
159), active focus area is highlighted in red (in photos taken using single-  
servo AF with dynamic-area AF, group dynamic-AF, or closest-subject prior-  
ity, area where focus first locked is highlighted).  
Page 3 (Shooting Data 1)*  
1
2
1 Voice memo icon...141  
2 Protect status.........137  
3 Camera name  
7 Exposure mode........85  
8 Exposure  
:
3
5
7
9
CAMERA  
NIKON D2H  
RIX  
METERING  
SHUTTER  
APERTURE  
4
6
8
compensation..........97  
:
:
1/250  
F5.6  
4 Metering method ....84  
9 Focal length...........228  
:
EXPOSURE MODE PROGRAM  
:
EXP.+/  
0.0  
5 Shutter speed ..........85 10 Folder number/frame  
6 Aperture..................85 number .................150  
FOCAL LENGTH 56mm  
100-1  
*Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode in playback menu  
159).  
10  
(
132  
Page 4 (Shooting Data 2)*  
1 Voice memo icon...141  
2 Protect status.........137  
3 Sensitivity  
(ISO equivalency) .....48  
4 White balance .........51 10 Folder number/frame  
1
2
6 Tone compensation..66  
7 Sharpening..............65  
8 Color mode .............67  
9 Image comment ....210  
:
3
5
7
9
ISO  
200  
0
WHITE BAL.  
WHITE BAL.  
TONE  
O
4
6
8
+
:
:
:
:
/
AUTO  
SHARPNESS  
COLOR MODE  
COMMENT  
AUTO  
MODE1  
5 White balance  
number .................150  
100-1  
adjustment ..............54  
10  
*Displayed only if Data is selected for Display mode in playback menu  
159).  
(
Page 5 (Histogram)*  
1
2
3
4
1 Voice memo icon................................................141  
2 Protect status......................................................137  
3 Histogram showing the distribution of tones in the  
image. The horizontal axis corresponds to pixel  
brightness, with dark tones to the left and bright  
tones to the right. The vertical axis shows the num-  
ber of pixels of each brightness in the image.  
4 Folder number/frame number.............................150  
100-1  
*Displayed only if Histogram is selected for Display mode in playback  
menu ( 159).  
Page 6 (Highlights)*  
1
2
3
1 Voice memo icon................................................141  
2 Protect status......................................................137  
3 Image highlights (brightest areas of image) are  
marked by a flashing border.  
4 Folder number/frame number.............................150  
*Displayed only if Highlights is selected for Display mode in playback  
menu ( 159).  
Highlight 100-1  
4
Histograms  
Camera histograms are for use only as a guide and may differ from those displayed in  
imaging applications.  
f3—Photo Info/Playback (  
200)  
The roles of the multi selector buttons can be reversed, so that the left and right but-  
tons display other images and the up and down buttons control photo information.  
133  
Viewing Multiple Images: Thumbnail Playback  
To display images in “contact sheets” of four or  
nine images, press the  
button and rotate the  
main command dial. The following operations  
can be performed while thumbnails are dis-  
played:  
100-1  
100-3  
100-2  
100-4  
To  
Press and/or rotate  
Description  
button and rotate main command dial  
to change the number of images displayed as  
follows: single imagefour thumbnailsnine  
thumbnailssingle image.  
Press  
Change  
number  
of images  
displayed  
Toggle  
full frame  
playback  
Press center of multi selector to switch back  
and forth between full frame and thumbnail  
playback.  
Highlight  
images  
Press multi selector up, right, left, or down to  
highlight thumbnails.  
Page  
through  
images  
Press  
button and rotate sub-command dial to  
scroll through images a page at a time.  
Confirmation dialog  
will be displayed.  
Press  
again to  
Delete?  
Yes  
Delete  
images  
delete photo. To exit  
without deleting pho-  
to, press multi selector  
left or right.  
100-3  
100-4  
Zoom in on  
highlighted  
photo  
Press  
for enlarged view of highlighted photo  
( )  
(
136).  
f1—Center Button>Playback Mode (  
198)  
Instead of toggling between full-frame and thumbnail playback, the center of the  
multi selector can be used to toggle playback zoom or display a histogram.  
134  
To  
Press and/or rotate  
Description  
If voice memo has not been recorded for high-  
lighted photo, voice memo will be recorded  
Record/  
play voice  
memo  
while  
button is pressed (  
140). If voice  
memo has been recorded for highlighted image,  
pressing button will start playback. Press again  
to pause playback (  
144).  
Images marked by  
icon can not be deleted  
Change  
protect  
status of  
highlighted  
photo  
using  
button or Delete option in playback  
menu (note that protected images will be delet-  
ed when memory card is formatted). To protect  
image, or to remove protection from protected  
image, press  
button (  
137).  
Display  
menus  
Press  
39).  
button to display camera menus (  
Return to  
shooting  
mode  
To end playback and return to shooting mode,  
press  
button or press shutter-release button  
Shutter-release/  
halfway.  
Using the Multi Selector  
The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector  
lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.  
Image Review (  
159)  
When On is selected for Image review in the playback menu, photographs are auto-  
matically displayed in the monitor as they are being recorded to the memory card. In  
single-frame and self-timer modes, photographs are displayed one at a time as they are  
taken. In continuous shooting mode, display begins when shooting ends. Thumbnail  
playback is only available in continuous shooting mode. Playback will be interrupted  
when the shutter-release button is pressed, and resume when the button is released  
after shooting.  
c5—Monitor Off (  
187)  
The monitor will turn off automatically to save power if no operations are performed  
for the time specified in Custom Setting c5 (Monitor off). Press the  
button again  
to return to playback mode.  
135  
Taking a Closer Look: Playback Zoom  
Press the  
button to zoom in on the image displayed in single-image play-  
back or on the image currently highlighted in thumbnail playback. The fol-  
lowing operations can be performed while zoom is in effect:  
To  
Press and/or rotate  
Description  
Cancel/  
resume  
zoom  
Press  
to cancel zoom and return to single-im-  
age or thumbnail playback. Press again to zoom  
image in.  
( )  
Press  
button to  
display frame showing  
area currently zoomed  
in.  
While  
but-  
ton is pressed, multi  
selector can be used  
to move frame and  
Select area  
displayed  
main command dial can be used to control size  
of frame (rotate dial counterclockwise to zoom  
out, clockwise to zoom in). Release  
magnify selected area to fill monitor.  
button to  
Rotate main command dial to view same area of  
other images at current zoom ratio.  
View other  
images  
Use multi selector to  
view area not visible  
in monitor. Hold multi  
selector down to scroll  
rapidly to other areas  
of frame.  
View other  
areas of  
image  
f1—Center Button>Playback Mode (  
198)  
Instead of toggling between full-frame and thumbnail playback, the center of the  
multi selector can be used to toggle playback zoom or display a histogram.  
136  
Protecting Photographs from Deletion  
In full-frame and thumbnail playback, the  
button can be used to protect  
photographs from accidental deletion. Protected files can not be deleted  
using the  
button or the Delete option in the playback menu, and have  
DOS “read-only” status when viewed on a Windows computer. Note that  
protected images will be deleted when the memory card is formatted.  
To protect a photograph:  
Display the image in full-frame playback or highlight it in the thumbnail  
1
2
list.  
Press the  
button. The photograph will be marked with a  
icon.  
100-1  
To remove protection from the photograph so that it can be deleted, display  
the photograph in full-frame playback or highlight it in the thumbnail list and  
then press the  
button.  
Voice Memos  
Changes to the protect status of images also apply to any voice memos that may have  
been recorded with the images. Voice memo protect status can not be set separately.  
Removing Protection from All Images  
To remove protection from all images in the folder or folders currently selected for  
playback, press the  
and  
buttons together for about two seconds.  
137  
Deleting Individual Photographs  
To delete a photograph displayed in single-image playback, or the photo-  
graph highlighted in thumbnail playback, press the button. Once deleted,  
photographs can not be recovered.  
Display the image in full-frame playback or highlight it in the thumbnail  
1
2
list.  
Press the button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed.  
Delete?  
Yes  
Delete?  
Yes  
100-3  
100-4  
100-1  
To delete the photograph, press the  
button again. To exit without  
3
deleting the photograph, press the multi selector left or right.  
Voice Memos  
If a voice memo has been recorded with the selected  
image, the confirmation dialog shown at right will be  
displayed when the  
Image/Sound: Select this option and press the  
button to delete both photo and voice memo.  
button is pressed.  
Delete?  
Image/Sound  
Sound only  
OK  
Sound only: Select this option and press the  
ton to delete only the voice memo.  
but-  
100-1  
To exit without deleting either voice memo or photo,  
press multi selector left or right.  
Protected and Hidden Images  
Images marked with a  
icon are protected and can not be deleted. Hidden images  
are not displayed in single-image or thumbnail playback and can not be selected for  
deletion.  
Delete (  
148)  
To delete multiple images, use the Delete option in the playback menu.  
After Delete ( 160)  
The After delete option in the playback menu determines whether the next image or  
the previous image is displayed after an image is deleted.  
138  
Voice Memos  
Recording and Playback  
The D2H is equipped with a built-in microphone,  
allowing voice memos to be added to photo-  
graphs. Voice memos can be played back over the  
cameras built-in speaker.  
139  
Recording Voice Memos  
Voice memos up to sixty seconds long can be added to photographs using  
the built-in microphone. In shooting mode, a voice memo can be added  
to the most recent photograph. In playback mode, voice memos can be  
added to photographs displayed in single-image playback or selected in the  
thumbnail list.  
Ready the camera for recording.  
1
Shooting Mode  
At default settings, voice memos can not be recorded in shooting mode.  
To enable automatic or manual voice memo recording, select the appro-  
priate option for Voice memo in the camera setup menu ( 212). Voice  
memos can only be added to the last photograph taken.  
Playback Mode  
Display the photograph to which the memo is to be added (single-image  
playback) or highlight the photograph in the thumbnail list (thumbnail  
playback). Only one voice memo can be recorded per image; a voice  
memo can not be recorded if one already exists for the selected image.  
Press and hold the button. A voice memo  
2
will be recorded while the button is held down  
(note that no voice memo will be recorded if  
the button is not held down for at least one  
second).  
Automatic Recording (Shooting Mode)  
If On (auto and manual) is selected for Voice memo, a voice memo  
will be recorded for the last photograph taken when the shutter-release  
button is released after shooting. Recording will end when the button  
is pressed or after the specified recording time has ended.  
Dust Off Ref Photos  
Voice memos can not be recorded for Image Dust Off reference data (  
214).  
140  
Interrupting Recording  
Recording will end automatically if:  
• The  
• The  
button is pressed to display the menus  
button is pressed  
• The shutter-release button is pressed halfway  
• The camera is turned off  
During interval timer photography, recording will end automatically about two seconds  
before the next photograph is taken.  
During Recording  
During recording, the  
control panel and viewfinder sidebar will  
blink. A countdown timer in the rear con-  
trol panel shows the length of the voice  
memo that can be recorded (in seconds).  
Rear control panel  
Monitor  
Viewfinder  
sidebar  
icons in the rear  
In playback mode, a icon is displayed in  
the monitor during recording.  
100-1  
After Recording  
Rear control panel  
Monitor  
Viewfinder  
sidebar  
If a voice memo has been recorded for  
the most recent photograph, a icon will  
be displayed in the rear control panel and  
viewfinder sidebar.  
If a voice memo exists for the photograph  
currently selected in playback mode, a  
icon will be displayed in the monitor.  
100-1  
Voice Memo File Names  
Voice memos are stored as WAV files with names of the form “DSC_nnnn.WAV,”  
where “nnnn“ is a four-digit file number copied from the image with which the voice  
memo is associated. For example, the voice memo for the image “DSC_0002.JPG”  
would have the file name “DSC_0002.WAV. Voice memo file names can be viewed  
on a computer.  
141  
Voice Memo Recording Options  
Three setup menu options control voice memo recording: Voice memo,  
Voice memo protect, and Voice memo button.  
Voice Memo  
To choose a voice memo option for shooting  
mode, highlight Voice memo in the setup menu  
SET UP  
Voice memo  
(
212) and press the multi selector to the right.  
Off  
OK  
The following options are available:  
On (auto and manual)  
Manual only  
Option  
Description  
Off  
(default)  
Voice memos can not be recorded in shooting mode.  
Selecting this option displays menu shown at  
SET UP  
Auto  
right; select maximum recording time from 5,  
10, 20, 30, 45, or 60s. Unless On is selected  
for Image review in playback menu, record-  
ing will begin when shutter-release button  
is released after shooting. Recording ends  
when button is pressed or after specified  
recording time has ended.  
5
10  
20  
30  
45  
60  
s
s
s
s
s
s
On  
(auto and  
manual)  
OK  
Manual Memo can be recorded for most recent photograph by pressing and  
only holding button ( 140).  
Voice Memo  
The option selected for Voice memo is indicated by an icon in the rear control panel.  
On (auto and manual)  
Manual only  
142  
Voice Memo Protect  
This option controls whether the voice memo for  
the most recent photograph can be overwritten in  
shooting mode. Highlight Voice memo protect  
in the setup menu ( 212) and press the multi  
selector to the right. The following options are  
available:  
SET UP  
Voice memo protect  
ON On  
OK  
OFF Off  
Option  
Description  
Voice memo can not be recorded in shooting mode if one already exists for  
On  
(default) most recent image.  
Voice memo can be recorded in shooting mode even if one already exists  
for most recent image. Existing memo will be deleted and replaced by new  
memo. Voice memos can not be overwritten in playback mode.  
Off  
Voice Memo Button  
This option controls manual recording. Highlight  
Voice memo button in the setup menu ( 212)  
and press the multi selector to the right. The fol-  
lowing options are available:  
SET UP  
Voice memo button  
Press and hold  
OK  
Press to start/stop  
Option  
Description  
Press and hold  
Voice memo is recorded while button is held down. Recording  
will end automatically after 60s.  
(default)  
Press to start/  
stop  
Recording begins when button is pressed and ends when but-  
ton is pressed again. Recording will end automatically after 60s.  
143  
Playing Voice Memos  
Voice memos can be played back over the cam-  
eras built-in speaker when the associated image  
is viewed in single-frame playback or highlighted  
in the thumbnail list. The presence of a voice  
memo is indicated by an icon.  
100-1  
To  
Press  
Description  
Start/end  
playback  
Press to start playback. Playback will end when button is  
pressed again or entire memo has been played back.  
Confirmation dialog will be dis-  
played. Press multi selector up or  
down to highlight option, press  
to select.  
Image/Sound: Delete both photo  
and voice memo.  
Sound only: Delete voice memo  
only.  
Delete?  
Image/Sound  
Sound only  
OK  
Delete  
voice  
memo  
100-1  
To exit without deleting image or voice memo, press multi  
selector left or right.  
Interrupting Playback  
Playback will end automatically if:  
• The  
button is pressed to display the menus  
• The monitor is turned off by pressing the button or by pressing the shutter-release  
button halfway  
• The camera is turned off  
• Another image is displayed (single-image playback) or another thumbnail is high-  
lighted (thumbnail playback).  
144  
Voice Memo Playback Options  
The Audio output option in the setup menu  
controls whether voice memos are played back  
over the cameras built-in speaker or by a device  
to which the camera is connected via the EG-D2  
audio/video cable. When sound is played back  
over the built-in speaker, the Audio output op-  
tion also controls playback volume.  
SET UP  
Audio output  
Via speaker  
Via VIDEO OUT  
Off  
Highlight Audio output in the setup menu (  
212) and press the multi  
selector to the right. The following options are available:  
Option  
Description  
Voice memos are played back over built-in  
speaker. Selecting this option displays menu  
shown at right. Press multi selector up or  
down to highlight desired volume. Beep  
will sound when option highlighted. Press  
multi selector to right to make selection and  
return to setup menu.  
SET UP  
Audio output  
Via speaker  
(default)  
OK  
0
Via VIDEO  
OUT  
Audio signal output to A/V-OUT terminal.  
Video memos are not played back.  
for which voice memo exists is viewed in monitor.  
icon is displayed when photo  
Off  
145  
146  
The Playback Menu  
148–160  
Menu Guide  
Index to Menu Options  
The Shooting Menu  
161–169  
Custom Settings  
170–205  
Changes to a variety of camera settings are made  
with the help of menus that appear in the camera  
monitor. This chapter covers:  
The Setup Menu  
206–219  
The Playback Menu  
The playback menu contains options for managing  
the images stored on memory cards, and for play-  
ing pictures back in automated slide shows.  
The Shooting Menu  
The shooting menu contains advanced shooting  
options, such as image sharpening and tone com-  
pensation.  
Custom Settings  
The CSM (Custom Settings) menu controls fine  
details of camera operation.  
The Setup Menu  
This menu is used for basic camera setup op-  
erations, including formatting memory cards and  
setting the time and date.  
147  
The Playback Menu  
Managing Images  
The playback menu contains the following options:  
PLAYBACK MENU  
Option  
Delete  
Playback folder  
Slide show  
Hide image  
Print set  
Display mode  
Image review  
After delete  
Delete  
Playback folder  
Slide show  
148–149  
150  
ND2H  
2s  
151–153  
154–155  
156–158  
159  
Hide image  
Print set  
Display mode  
Image review  
After delete  
159  
160  
The playback menu is not displayed if no memory card is inserted.  
Delete  
PLAYBACK MENU  
Delete  
To display the delete menu, highlight Delete and  
press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
Selected  
All  
Option  
Selected Delete selected photographs.  
All Delete all photographs.  
Description  
High-Capacity Memory Cards  
If the memory card contains a large number of files or folders and the number of pic-  
tures to be deleted is very large, deletion can sometimes take more than half an hour.  
Protected and Hidden Images  
Images marked with a  
icon are protected and can not be deleted. Hidden images  
(
154) are not displayed in the thumbnail list and can not be selected for deletion.  
Using the Multi Selector  
The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector  
lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.  
148  
Deleting Selected Photographs: Selected  
Choosing Selected displays the photographs in the folder or folders selected  
in the Playback folder menu ( 150) as small thumbnail images.  
PLAYBACK MENU  
PLAYBACK MENU  
Set  
Zoom  
100-2  
100-5  
OK  
Set  
Zoom  
100-2  
100-5  
OK  
1
2
100-1  
100-3  
100-1  
100-3  
100-4  
100-6  
100-4  
100-6  
Highlight image. (To view highlight-  
ed image full screen, press . Press  
again to return to thumbnail list.)  
Select highlighted image. Selected  
image marked by icon.  
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select additional pictures. To deselect picture,  
highlight and press center of multi selector. To exit without deleting  
3
4
pictures, press  
button.  
Confirmation dialog displayed. Press  
multi selector up or down to highlight  
PLAYBACK MENU  
Selected  
Delete 2  
images/Sounds  
option, press  
to select.  
Yes: delete selected pictures and any  
associated voice memos  
OK  
No  
No: exit without deleting images  
Yes  
Deleting All Photographs: All  
Choosing All displays the confirmation dialog  
shown at right. Press the multi selector up or  
down to highlight an option, then press the  
button to make a selection.  
PLAYBACK MENU  
All  
Deleting  
all images  
Yes: delete all images in the folder or folders se-  
lected in the Playback folder menu ( 150),  
together with any associated voice memos.  
Pictures that are protected or hidden will not be  
deleted.  
No  
OK  
Yes  
No: exit without deleting images.  
149  
Playback Folder  
To display the playback folder menu, highlight  
Playback folder in the playback menu ( 148)  
and press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
PLAYBACK MENU  
Playback folder  
NCD2H  
All  
OK  
Current  
Option  
Description  
NCD2H Images in all folders created by the D2H will be visible during playback.  
Images in all folders created by cameras that conform to the Design  
Rule for Camera File System (DCF)—all Nikon digital cameras and most  
other makes of digital camera—will be visible during playback.  
All  
Current Only images in the current folder will be visible during playback.  
Selecting a Folder for Storage  
The Active folder option in the shooting menu is used to create new folders and to  
select the folder in which subsequent photographs will be stored (  
165).  
“Current”  
If multiple folders are created using the Active folder>New option in the shooting  
menu ( 165), only photographs in the folder selected in the Active folder menu will  
be played back when Current is selected for Playback folder. To view photographs  
in other folders, select NCD2H or All.  
Creating a Folder at Startup  
If the  
button is pressed when the camera is turned on, a new folder will be created  
if no empty folders are already present on the memory card. The folder number for  
the new folder will be one greater than largest folder number on the card. No folder  
will be created if the largest folder number on the card is 999.  
150  
Slide Show  
To play images back one after the other in an  
automated “slide show,” highlight Slide show in  
the playback menu ( 148) and press the multi  
selector to the right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
PLAYBACK MENU  
Slide show  
Start  
OK  
Frame intvl  
Audio playback  
Option  
Start  
Description  
Start slide show.  
Choose how long each picture will be displayed.  
Frame intvl  
Audio playback Display menu of voice memo playback options.  
Starting the Slide Show: Start  
Selecting Start starts an automated slide show. All photographs in the folder  
or folders selected in the Playback folder menu ( 150) will be played back  
in the order recorded, with a pause between each image. Hidden photo-  
graphs ( 154) will not be played back. The following operations can be  
performed during a slide show:  
To  
Press  
Description  
Go forward or  
back one frame  
Press multi selector up to return to previous frame, down  
to skip to next frame.  
View photo  
info  
Press multi selector left or right to change photo info  
displayed during slide show.  
Pause  
Press  
to pause slide show (  
152).  
Exit to playback  
menu  
Press  
Press  
to end slide show and display playback menu.  
to end slide show and return to playback with  
Exit to playback  
mode  
current image displayed in monitor.  
Exit to shooting Shutter Press shutter-release button halfway to end slide show,  
mode release turn monitor off, and return to shooting mode.  
151  
Pause  
The dialog shown at right is displayed when the  
show ends or when the button is pressed to  
pause playback. Press the multi selector up or  
down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
Restart  
OK  
Frame intvl  
Restart: Resume slide show.  
Audio playback  
Frame intvl: Change the length of time each  
picture is displayed.  
Audio playback: Display a menu of voice memo playback options.  
To exit the slide show and return to the playback menu, press the multi se-  
lector to the left or press the button.  
Changing the Display Interval: Frame Intvl  
Selecting Frame intvl from the Slide show menu  
or the pause menu displays the menu shown at  
right. To change the length of time each image is  
displayed, press the multi selector up or down to  
highlight the appropriate option and then press  
the multi selector to the right to return to the  
previous menu.  
PLAYBACK MENU  
Frame intvl  
2s  
3s  
5s  
2 s  
3 s  
OK  
5 s  
10s  
10 s  
152  
Voice Memo Playback Options: Audio Playback  
Selecting Audio playback from the Slide show  
PLAYBACK MENU  
Audio playback  
menu or the pause menu displays the menu  
shown at right. Press the multi selector up or  
down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
OFF Off  
ON On  
OK  
On: voice memos are played back during slide  
shows. The menu shown at right will be dis-  
played; press the multi selector up or down to  
highlight an option, then press to the right to  
make a selection.  
PLAYBACK MENU  
Audio playback  
Display image for:  
Frame interval  
OK  
Length of voice memo  
Option  
Description  
Playback will end when next frame is displayed, even if entire  
memo has not been played.  
Frame intvl  
Length of Next frame will not be displayed until entire memo has been  
voice menu played, even if frame interval is shorter than voice memo.  
Off: voice memos will not be played back during slide shows.  
153  
Hide Image  
The Hide image option is used to hide or reveal selected photographs. Hid-  
den images are visible only in the Hide image menu, and can only be deleted  
by formatting the memory card.  
Highlight Hide image in the playback menu (  
148) and press the multi selector to the right.  
PLAYBACK MENU  
Hide image  
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight  
an option, then press to the right to make a selec-  
Select / set  
tion.  
Deselect all?  
Option  
Description  
Select/set Hide or reveal selected photographs.  
Deselect all? Reveal all photographs.  
Hiding Selected Photographs: Select/Set  
Choosing Select/set displays the photographs in the folder or folders se-  
lected in the Playback folder menu ( 150) as small thumbnail images.  
PLAYBACK MENU  
PLAYBACK MENU  
Set  
Zoom  
100-2  
100-5  
OK  
Set  
Zoom  
100-2  
100-5  
OK  
1
2
100-1  
100-3  
100-1  
100-3  
100-4  
100-6  
100-4  
100-6  
Highlight image. (To view highlight-  
ed image full screen, press . Press  
again to return to thumbnail list.)  
Select highlighted image. Selected  
image marked by icon.  
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select  
additional pictures. To deselect  
picture, highlight and press  
center of multi selector. To exit  
without changing hidden status  
PLAYBACK MENU  
Set Zoom  
OK  
3
4
Hide image done  
of pictures, press  
button.  
Complete operation and return to  
playback menu.  
154  
Revealing All Photographs: Deselect All  
Choosing Deselect all? displays the confirmation  
dialog shown at right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press the  
button to make a selection.  
Yes: reveal all images in the folder or folders se-  
lected in the Playback folder menu ( 150).  
The monitor will briefly show the message  
“Hide image done,” and then the playback  
menu will be displayed.  
PLAYBACK MENU  
Hide image  
No images will be  
hidden. OK?  
No  
OK  
Yes  
No: exit to the playback menu without changing the hidden status of im-  
ages.  
File Attributes for Hidden Images  
Hidden images have “hidden” and “read-only” status when viewed on a Windows  
computer. In the case of “NEF+JPEG” images, this marking applies to both the NEF  
(RAW) and JPEG image.  
Protected and Hidden Images  
Removing protection from an image that is both hidden and protected will simultane-  
ously reveal the image.  
155  
Print Set  
Print set is used to create a digital “print order” that lists the photographs  
to be printed, the number of copies, and the information to be included on  
each print. This information is stored on the memory card in Digital Print  
Order Format (DPOF). The card can then be removed from the camera and  
used to print the selected images printed on any DPOF-compatible device.  
Highlight Print set in the playback menu ( 148)  
and press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
PLAYBACK MENU  
Print set  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
Select / set  
Deselect all?  
Option  
Description  
Select/set Select photographs for printing.  
Deselect all? Remove all images from print order.  
NEF Images  
Images created at image quality settings of NEF (Raw) ( 41) can not be selected for  
printing using this option.  
Taking Pictures for Direct Printing  
When taking images to be printed without modification, set the Color mode option  
in the shooting menu to I (sRGB) or III (sRGB) (  
67).  
After Creating a Print Order  
After creating a print order, do not change the hidden status of images in the print  
order or use a computer or other device to delete images. Either action could cause  
problems during printing.  
DPOF  
Digital Print Order Format (DPOF) is an industry-wide standard that allows pictures to  
be printed from print orders stored on the memory card. Before printing, check that  
the printer or print service supports DPOF. Even without access to a DPOF-compatible  
device, images can still be printed using the software provided with the camera if the  
computer is connected to a color printer. Photofinishers that do not support DPOF may  
accept photographs for printing by e-mail, through web sites, or on removable media  
such as Zip disks. Contact the photofinisher for information on delivery and the file  
formats accepted.  
156  
Modifying the Print Order: Select/Set  
Choosing Select/set displays the photographs in the folder or folders se-  
lected in the Playback folder menu ( 150) as small thumbnail images.  
Highlight image. (To view highlighted  
image full screen, press . Press again  
to return to thumbnail list.)  
PLAYBACK MENU  
Set Zoom  
OK  
1
2
100-1  
100-4  
100-2  
100-3  
100-6  
100-5  
Press  
button and press multi selector  
PLAYBACK MENU  
Set Zoom  
OK  
up or down to specify number of prints  
(up to 9), or press center of multi se-  
lector to select image and set number  
of prints to 1. Selected images are  
100-1  
1
100-2  
100-3  
100-6  
marked by  
icon.  
100-4  
100-5  
Repeat steps 1 and 2 to select additional pictures. To deselect picture,  
highlight and press center of multi selector. To exit without changing  
3
4
print order, press  
button.  
PLAYBACK MENU  
Print set  
Print set done  
Complete print order and display menu of print options. Press multi selector  
up or down to highlight option.  
• To print shutter speed and aperture on all pictures in print order, highlight  
Data imprint and press multi selector to right. will appear next to item.  
• To print date of recording on all pictures in print order, highlight Imprint  
date and press multi selector to right. will appear next to item.  
• To deselect checked item, highlight and press multi selector to right.  
To complete print order and return to playback menu, highlight Done and  
press multi selector to right. To exit without altering print order, press  
button.  
157  
Removing All Images from the Print Order: Deselect All  
Choosing Deselect all? displays the confirmation  
PLAYBACK MENU  
Print set  
dialog shown at right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press the  
button to make a selection.  
Yes: remove all images in the folder or folders  
selected in the Playback folder menu ( 150)  
from the print order. The monitor will briefly  
show the message “Print set done,” and then  
the playback menu will be displayed.  
Deselect all print  
settings?  
No  
OK  
Yes  
No: exit to the playback menu without changing the print order.  
Exif version 2.21  
The D2H supports Exif (Exchangeable Image File Format for Digital Still Cameras) ver-  
sion 2.21, a standard that allows information stored with photographs to be used for  
optimal color reproduction when images are output on Exif-compliant printers.  
158  
Display Mode  
Display mode determines what information is  
included in the photo-information display (  
132). Highlight Display mode in the playback  
menu ( 148) and press the multi selector to the  
right. Press the multi selector up or down to high-  
light an option, then press to the right to make a  
selection. A appears next to selected items; to  
deselect, highlight and press the multi selector to  
the right.  
PLAYBACK MENU  
Display mode  
Done  
OK  
Data  
Histogram  
Highlight  
Focus area  
Option  
Data*  
Description  
Include shooting data in photo information display.  
Histogram* Include histogram in photo information display.  
Highlights* Include highlights in photo information display.  
Active focus area (if single-servo AF is used with dynamic-area AF,  
group dynamic-AF, or closest-subject priority, area where focus first  
locked) is shown in red in photo information display.  
Focus area  
*Default selection.  
To exit the display mode menu and return to the playback menu, highlight  
Done and press the multi selector to the right.  
Image Review  
Image review controls whether or not photo-  
graphs are displayed in the monitor immediately  
PLAYBACK MENU  
Image review  
after shooting. Highlight Image review in the  
Off  
On  
OK  
playback menu ( 148) and press the multi se-  
lector to the right. Press the multi selector up or  
down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
Option  
Off  
Description  
Photographs are not automatically displayed after shooting.  
Photographs are automatically displayed after shooting.  
On  
159  
After Delete  
After delete determines whether the follow-  
ing or previous photograph is displayed after  
an image is deleted. Highlight After delete in  
the playback menu ( 148) and press the multi  
selector to the right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
PLAYBACK MENU  
After delete  
Show next  
OK  
Show previous  
Continue as before  
Option  
Description  
After image is deleted, following image is displayed in monitor  
(single-image playback) or highlighted in thumbnail list (thumbnail  
playback). If deleted image was last frame in memory, previous  
frame will be displayed or highlighted.  
Show next  
(default)  
After image is deleted, previous image is displayed in monitor (single-  
image playback) or highlighted in thumbnail list (thumbnail play-  
back). If deleted image was first frame in memory, following frame  
will be displayed or highlighted.  
Show  
previous  
If user was scrolling through images in order recorded before dele-  
tion, following image will be displayed or highlighted (if deleted im-  
age was last frame in memory, previous frame will be displayed or  
highlighted). If user was scrolling through images in reverse order,  
previous image will be displayed or highlighted (if deleted image  
was first frame in memory, following frame will be displayed or  
highlighted).  
Continue as  
before  
160  
The Shooting Menu  
Managing Images  
The shooting menu contains two pages of options:  
SHOOTING MENU  
Option  
Shooting menu bank  
Reset shooting menu  
Active folder  
File name  
Image quality  
Image size  
A
Shooting menu bank  
Reset shooting menu  
Active folder  
162–163  
164  
165  
166  
167  
167  
167  
167  
168  
168  
168  
168  
169  
169  
169  
100  
DSC  
NORM  
Raw compression  
White bal.  
ON  
A
File name  
Image quality  
Image size  
SHOOTING MENU  
White bal.  
A
200  
A
ISO  
Raw compression  
White bal.  
Image sharpening  
Tone compensation  
Color mode  
Hue adjustment  
Intvl timer shooting  
Non-CPU lens data  
A
I
0°  
OFF  
ISO  
Image sharpening  
Tone compensation  
Color mode  
Hue adjustment  
Intvl timer shooting  
Non-CPU lens data  
To display the second page of options, highlight ISO and press the multi se-  
lector down, or highlight Shooting menu bank and press the multi selector  
up. To return to the first page, highlight White bal. and press the multi  
selector up, or highlight Non-CPU lens data and press the multi selector  
down.  
Using the Multi Selector  
The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector  
lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.  
161  
Shooting Menu Bank  
Shooting menu settings are stored in one of four banks. Changes to settings  
in one bank have no effect on the others. To store a particular combination  
of frequently-used settings, select one of the four banks and set the camera  
to these settings. The new settings will be stored in the bank even when the  
camera is turned off, and will be restored the next time the bank is selected.  
Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other banks, allowing  
the user to switch instantly from one combination to another by selecting the  
appropriate bank from the bank menu.  
The default names for the four shooting menu banks are A, B, C, and D. A  
descriptive caption can be added using the Rename option.  
To display the bank menu, highlight Shooting  
menu bank in the shooting menu ( 161) and  
SHOOTING MENU  
Shooting menu bank  
press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
OK  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
Rename  
Option  
Description  
A*  
(default)  
Select bank A.  
B*  
C*  
D*  
Select bank B.  
Select bank C.  
Select bank D.  
Rename Rename selected bank.  
*Descriptive caption will also be displayed if bank has been renamed.  
Sensitivity (ISO Equivalency)  
If a bank in which ISO has been set to HI-1 or HI-2 is chosen after On is selected for  
Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto;  
182), sensitivity (ISO equivalency) will NOT be ad-  
justed automatically.  
Shooting Menu Bank  
The rear control panel shows the bank currently selected  
in the shooting menu bank menu.  
162  
Renaming Shooting Menu Banks  
Highlight Rename and press the multi selector to the right.  
1
2
A list of shooting menu banks will be dis-  
played. Highlight the desired bank and press  
the multi selector to the right.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Shooting menu bank  
Rename  
The following dialog will be displayed. Enter a name as described be-  
low.  
3
SHOOTING MENU  
cursor  
Input  
OK  
.
< =  
Keyboard area  
!
"
# $ % &  
'
(
)
*
+
:
,
;
Use multi selector  
to highlight letters,  
press center of multi  
selector to select.  
Name area  
/
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
> ?@A B C D E F G H I J K L  
M N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z  
_ a b c d e g h l m  
n o p q u v w x y z  
Name appears here.  
To move cursor, press  
button and use  
multi selector.  
[
]
f
i
j
k
r
s
t
{
}
To move the cursor in the name area, press the  
button and use the  
multi selector. To enter a new letter at the current cursor position, use  
the multi selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area  
and press the center of the multi selector. To delete the character at the  
current cursor position, press the  
menu without changing the bank name, press the  
button. To return to the shooting  
button.  
Bank names can be up to twenty characters long. Any characters after  
the twentieth will be deleted.  
After editing the name, press  
the bank menu.  
to return to  
SHOOTING MENU  
Shooting menu bank  
4
Snap  
OK  
Rename  
163  
Reset Shooting Menu  
To restore default settings for the current shooting  
SHOOTING MENU  
Reset shooting menu  
menu bank (  
162), highlight Reset shooting  
menu in the shooting menu ( 161) and press  
the multi selector to the right. Press the multi  
selector up or down to highlight an option, then  
press to the right to make a selection.  
No  
OK  
Yes  
Option  
Description  
No Exit menu, leaving settings unchanged.  
Yes Restore settings to default values.  
The following settings are affected:  
Option  
File name  
Default  
DSC  
Option  
Default  
Interval timer shooting  
Start time  
Image quality  
Image size  
JPEG Normal  
Large  
Now  
Interval  
00:01´:00˝  
Raw compression Comp. NEF (Raw)  
No. of intervals  
No. of shots  
Start  
1
1
White bal.  
ISO  
Auto*  
200  
Off  
Image sharpening  
Auto  
Non-CPU lens data  
Tone  
compensation  
Focal length  
N/A  
N/A  
Auto  
Maximum  
aperture  
Color mode  
Hue  
I (sRGB)  
0
*Fine tuning reset to 0.  
Two-Button Reset (  
128)  
Default settings for image quality, image size, white balance, and sensitivity (ISO  
equivalency) can also be restored by performing a two-button reset.  
Creating a Folder at Startup  
If the  
button is pressed when the camera is turned on, a new folder will be created  
if no empty folders are already present on the memory card. Note that no folder will  
be created if the most recent folder is numbered 999.  
164  
Active Folder  
To select the folder in which subsequent im-  
ages will be stored, highlight Active folder in  
the shooting menu ( 161) and press the multi  
selector to the right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Active folder  
New  
Select folder  
Option  
Description  
Dialog shown at right will be displayed; press  
multi selector up or down to choose number  
for new folder. Press multi selector to right  
to create new folder and return to shoot-  
ing menu. Subsequent photographs will be  
stored in new folder.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Active folder  
New  
New  
OK  
100  
List of existing folders will be displayed; press  
multi selector up or down to highlight folder,  
press to right to select and return to shoot-  
ing menu. Subsequent photographs will be  
stored in selected folder.  
SHOOTING MENU  
Select folder  
100NCD2H  
101NCD2H  
OK  
Select  
folder  
Number of Folders  
Additional time will be required for recording and playback if the memory card con-  
tains a very large number of folders.  
Automatic Folder Creation  
If the current folder contains 999 files, or if sequential file numbering (  
191) is on  
and the current folder contains a picture numbered 9999, the camera will automati-  
cally create a new folder for the next picture by adding one to the current folder num-  
ber. If the memory card already contains a folder numbered 999, the shutter release  
will be disabled. If sequential file numbering is on, the shutter release will also be  
disabled if the current folder is numbered 999 and contains a picture numbered 9999.  
To continue shooting, create a folder with a number less than 999, or select an existing  
folder with a number less than 999 and less than 999 images.  
165  
File Name  
Photographs are saved using file names consisting  
of “DSC_” or “_DSC” followed by a four-digit  
file number and a three-letter extension (e.g.,  
“DSC_0001.JPG”). The File name option is used  
to change the “DSC” portion of the file name.  
Highlight File name in the shooting menu (  
161) and press the multi selector to the right. The  
menu shown at right will be displayed; press the  
multi selector to the right to display the following  
dialog.  
SHOOTING MENU  
File name  
File name  
:
sRGB  
DSC_1234  
:
AdobeRGB  
_DSC1234  
SHOOTING MENU  
cursor  
Input  
OK  
Keyboard area  
File name  
Use multi selector to  
highlight letters, press  
center of multi selector  
to select.  
File name area  
File name appears here.  
To move cursor left or  
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
A B C D E F G H I J K L M  
N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z  
right, press  
button  
DSC  
and use multi selector.  
To move the cursor left or right in the file name area, press the button and  
use the multi selector. To enter a new letter at the current cursor position,  
use the multi selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area  
and press the center of the multi selector. To delete the character at the cur-  
rent cursor position, press the  
without changing the comment, press the  
button. To return to the shooting menu  
button.  
After editing the file name, press to return to the shooting menu. New  
photographs will be saved using the new file name.  
166  
Image Quality  
Eight options are available for image quality. See  
Taking Photographs: Image Quality and Size”  
SHOOTING MENU  
Image quality  
)+  
(
NEF Raw JPEG Fine  
(
)+  
NEF Raw JPEG Normal  
(
41).  
(
)+  
NEF Raw JPEG Basic  
(
)
NEF Raw  
(
)
TIFF RGB  
JPEG Fine  
JPEG Normal  
JPEG Basic  
OK  
Image Size  
Image size can be selected from Large (2464×  
1632 4.0M) and Medium (1840×1224 2.2M).  
See “Taking Photographs: Image Quality and  
Size” ( 45).  
SHOOTING MENU  
Image size  
Large 2464x1632  
(
)
4.0M  
OK  
Medium 1840x1224  
(
)
2.2M  
Raw Compression  
Choose whether to compress NEF (RAW) images  
created at image-quality settings of RAW+JPEG  
(Fine), RAW+JPEG (Normal), RAW+JPEG (Ba-  
sic), and NEF (Raw). See Taking Photographs:  
Image Quality and Size” ( 44).  
SHOOTING MENU  
Raw compression  
(
ON Comp. NEF Raw OK  
(
)
OFF NEF Raw  
White Balance  
Nine options are available for white balance. See  
Taking Photographs: White Balance” ( 51).  
SHOOTING MENU  
White bal.  
Auto  
Incandescent  
Fluorescent  
Direct sunlight  
Flash  
Cloudy  
Shade  
167  
ISO  
Sensitivity (ISO equivalency) can be increased from  
the default value, which is roughly equivalent to  
ISO 200. Settings of HI-1 and HI-2 are only avail-  
able when Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto) is off.  
See “Taking Photographs: Sensitivity (ISO Equiva-  
lency)” ( 48).  
SHOOTING MENU  
ISO  
2 0 0  
2 5 0  
3 2 0  
4 0 0  
5 0 0  
6 4 0  
8 0 0  
OK  
OK  
OK  
Image Sharpening  
Seven options are available for image sharpening.  
See “Taking Photographs: Image Adjustment”  
SHOOTING MENU  
Image sharpening  
Auto  
Normal  
Low  
(
65).  
Medium low  
Medium high  
High  
None  
Tone Compensation  
Five options are available for controlling image  
contrast. See Taking Photographs: Image Ad-  
justment” ( 66).  
SHOOTING MENU  
Tone compensation  
Auto  
Normal  
Less contrast  
More contrast  
Custom  
Color Mode  
Choose from three color modes. See “Taking  
Photographs: Image Adjustment” ( 67).  
SHOOTING MENU  
Color mode  
(
(
(
)
sRGB  
OK  
)
AdobeRGB  
)
sRGB  
168  
Hue Adjustment  
Hue can be set to values between approximately  
9° and +9° in seven increments of roughly 3°.  
See “Taking Photographs: Image Adjustment”  
SHOOTING MENU  
Hue adjustment  
(
69).  
OK  
0
Interval Timer Shooting  
Take photographs automatically at pre-selected  
intervals. See Taking Photographs: Interval Timer  
Photography” ( 118).  
SHOOTING MENU  
Intvl timer shooting  
Status  
---  
Now  
Start  
Start time  
Current time  
Start time  
Interval  
10 19  
-- --  
00 01 00  
Non-CPU Lens Data  
If the focal length and maximum aperture have  
been specified in advance, the D2H supports  
such features as color matrix metering, aperture  
value display, and balanced fill flash with non-  
CPU lenses. See “Taking Photographs: Non-CPU  
Lenses” ( 124).  
SHOOTING MENU  
Non-CPU lens data  
Focal length  
Maximum aperture  
169  
Custom Settings  
Fine-Tuning Camera Settings  
Custom settings are used to fine-tune a variety of camera settings to suit the  
users preferences, creating combinations of settings that differ from the fac-  
tory defaults in effect at the time your camera was purchased. In addition to  
Custom Settings C (Bank select) and R (Menu reset), settings in the CSM  
(Custom Settings) menu are divided into the following six groups:  
CSM MENU  
Group  
a Autofocus  
Custom Settings  
a1–a8  
C Bank select  
A
R Menu reset  
a Autofocus  
b Metering/Exposure  
c Timers/AE&AF Lock  
d Shooting/Display  
e Bracketing/Flash  
f Controls  
b1–b6  
b Metering/Exposure  
c Timers/AE&AF Lock  
d Shooting/Display  
e Bracketing/Flash  
c1–c5  
f
Controls  
d1–d7  
e1–e8  
f1–f7  
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight  
the desired group and then press the multi se-  
lector to the right. The full list of Custom Set-  
tings a1–f7 will be displayed, starting with the  
settings in the selected group. To select a setting  
in a different group, press the multi selector up or  
down scroll until the desired setting is displayed,  
or press the multi selector to the left to return the  
CSM MENU  
a1 AF-C mode priority  
a2 AF-S mode priority  
a3 Group dynamic AF  
a4 Disable Lock-On  
a5 AF activation  
a6 Focus area Illum  
a7 Focus area  
a8 Vertical AF-ON  
ON  
ON  
OFF  
top menu and select a different group. Custom Setting a1 (AF-C mode pri-  
ority) and f7 (No CF card?) are linked: pressing the multi selector up when  
Custom Setting a1 is highlighted displays Custom Setting f7, while pressing  
the multi selector down while Custom Setting f7 is highlighted displays Cus-  
tom Setting a1.  
Using the Multi Selector  
The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector  
lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.  
170  
The following Custom Settings are available:  
Options  
C
R
a
Bank select  
Custom setting  
173  
174  
Menu reset  
Reset CSM menu  
Autofocus  
a1 AF-C mode priority  
a2 AF-S mode priority  
a3 Group dynamic AF  
a4 Disable Lock-On  
a5 AF activation  
a6 Focus area Illum  
a7 Focus area  
AF-C priority Selection  
176  
176  
AF-S priority Selection  
Pattern selection in Group Dynamic AF  
Disable focus tracking with Lock-On  
AF activation  
177–178  
179  
179  
Focus area Illumination  
Focus area select  
180–181  
181  
a8 Vertical AF ON  
Metering/Exposure  
b1 ISO auto  
Vertical AF ON button function  
182  
b
ISO auto control  
182–183  
183  
b2 ISO step value  
b3 EV step  
ISO step value  
EV steps for exposure control  
EV steps for exposure compensation  
Easy exposure compensation  
Center weight area  
184  
b4 Exposure comp. EV  
b5 Exposure comp.  
b6 Center weight  
Timers/AE&AF Lock  
c1 AE Lock  
184  
184–185  
185  
c
AE Lock buttons  
186  
186  
187  
187  
187  
c2 AE-L/AF-L  
Assignment of AE-L/AF-L button  
Auto meter-off delay  
Self-timer delay  
c3 Auto meter-off  
c4 Self-timer  
c5 Monitor off  
Monitor off delay  
171  
Options  
d
Shooting/Display  
d1 Shooting speed  
d2 Maximum shots  
d3 Exp. delay mode  
d4 Long exp. NR  
d5 File No. Seq.  
CL-Mode shooting speed  
C-Mode max. shots  
188  
188  
Exposure delay mode  
189  
Long exposure noise reduction  
File number sequence  
Control panel/viewfinder display  
LCD Illumination  
190  
191  
d6 Cntrl panel/finder  
d7 Illumination  
192–193  
193  
e
Bracketing/Flash  
e1 Flash sync speed  
e2 Flash shutter spd  
e3 AA flash mode  
e4 Modeling flash  
e5 Auto BKT set  
Flash sync speed setting  
194  
194  
195  
195  
196  
197  
197  
198  
Slowest shutter speed when using flash  
AA flash mode  
Preview button activates modeling flash  
Auto bracketing set  
e6 Manual mode bkting Auto bracketing in M exposure mode  
e7 Auto BKT order  
e8 Auto BKT selection  
Controls  
Auto bracketing order  
Auto bracketing selection method  
f
f1 Center button  
f2 Multi selector  
f3 PhotoInfo/Playback  
f4 FUNC. button  
f5 Command dials  
f6 Buttons and dials  
f7 No CF card?  
Multi selector center button  
When multi selector is pressed:  
Role of multi selector in full-frame playback  
Assign FUNC. button  
198–199  
200  
200  
201  
Customize command dials  
202–204  
204–205  
205  
Setting method for buttons and dials  
Disable shutter if no CF card  
172  
Custom Setting C: Bank Select  
Custom Settings are stored in one of four banks. Changes to settings in  
one bank have no effect on the others. To store a particular combination of  
frequently-used settings, select one of the four banks and set the camera to  
these settings. The new settings will be stored in the bank even when the  
camera is turned off, and will be restored the next time the bank is selected.  
Different combinations of settings can be stored in the other banks, allowing  
the user to switch instantly from one combination to another by selecting the  
appropriate bank from the bank menu.  
The default names for the four Custom Settings banks are A, B, C, and D. A  
descriptive caption can be added using the Rename option as described in  
“The Shooting Menu: Shooting Menu Bank” ( 162).  
To display the bank menu, highlight Bank select  
CSM MENU  
Custom settingbank  
C
in the top level of the CSM menu ( 170) and  
press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
OK  
Rename  
Option  
Description  
A*  
(default)  
Select bank A.  
B*  
C*  
D*  
Select bank B.  
Select bank C.  
Select bank D.  
Rename Rename selected bank.  
*Descriptive caption will also be displayed if bank has been renamed.  
Sensitivity (ISO Equivalency)  
If a bank in which On is selected for Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto;  
182) is chosen  
after ISO has been set to HI-1 or HI-2, sensitivity (ISO equivalency) will NOT be adjusted  
automatically.  
173  
Custom Setting R: Menu Reset  
To restore default settings for the current Custom  
Settings bank ( 173), highlight Menu reset in  
the top level of the CSM menu ( 170) and press  
the multi selector to the right. Press the multi  
selector up or down to highlight an option, then  
press to the right to make a selection.  
CSM MENU  
R
Reset CSM menu  
No  
OK  
Yes  
Option  
Description  
No Exit menu, leaving settings unchanged.  
Yes Restore settings to default values.  
Two-Button Reset  
Custom Settings are not reset when a two-button reset is performed (  
128).  
Custom Settings Bank  
If settings in the current bank have been modified from  
default values, the rear control panel display will show  
CUSTOM and the letter of the bank. An asterisk will be  
displayed next to the altered settings in the second level  
of the Custom Settings menu.  
174  
Default settings are listed below.  
Option  
Default  
FPS rate  
Focus  
Option  
Default  
a1 AF-C mode priority  
a2 AF-S mode priority  
d5 File No. Seq.  
Off  
d6 Cntrl panel/finder  
Rear control panel  
ISO  
Frame count  
Lamp on switch  
1/250  
Pattern 1/  
Closest subject  
a3 Group dynamic AF  
Viewfinder display  
a4 Disable Lock-On  
a5 AF activation  
a6 Focus area Illum  
Manual focus mode  
Continuous mode  
When selected  
No  
d7 Illumination  
Shutter/AF-ON  
e1 Flash sync speed  
e2 Flash shutter spd  
e3 AA flash mode  
e4 Modeling flash  
e5 Auto BKT set  
e6 Manual mode bkting  
e7 Auto BKT order  
1/60  
On  
On  
On  
On  
0.2s  
AE & flash  
Flash/speed  
MTR>Under>Over  
a7 Focus area  
No wrap  
AF-ON+Focus area  
Off  
a8 Vertical AF ON  
b1 ISO auto  
e8 Auto BKT selection Manual value select  
b2 ISO step value  
b3 EV step  
1/3 step  
1/3 step  
1/3 step  
[+/-] & CMD dial  
φ 8mm  
AE-L/AF-L button  
AE/AF Lock  
6s  
f1 Center button  
Shooting mode  
Playback mode  
Center AF area  
Thumbnail on/off  
Do nothing  
b4 Exposure comp. EV  
b5 Exposure comp.  
b6 Center weight  
c1 AE Lock  
f2 Multi selector  
f3 PhotoInfo/Playback  
f4 FUNC. button  
f5 Command dials  
Rotate direction  
Info  
/PB▲▼  
FV Lock  
c2 AE-L/AF-L  
c3 Auto meter-off  
c4 Self-timer  
Normal  
Off  
10s  
Change Main/Sub  
c5 Monitor off  
d1 Shooting speed  
d2 Maximum shots  
d3 Exp. delay mode  
d4 Long exp. NR  
20s  
Aperture setting  
Sub-command dial  
3fps  
Menus and Playback  
f6 Buttons and dials  
f7 No CF card?  
Off  
Default  
On  
40frames  
Off  
Off  
175  
Custom Setting a1: AF-C Mode Priority  
This option controls whether photographs can  
be taken whenever the shutter-release button is  
pressed (release priority) or only when the camera  
is in focus (focus priority) in continuous-servo AF.  
Highlight a1 AF-C mode priority in the second  
CSM MENU  
a1 AF-C priority  
selection  
FPS rate  
OK  
+
FPS rate AF  
Focus  
level of the CSM menu (  
171) and press the  
multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector  
up or down to highlight an option, then press to  
the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
FPS rate  
(default)  
Photos can be taken whenever shutter-release button is pressed.  
Photos can be taken even when camera is not in focus. In continu-  
ous mode, frame rate slows for improved focus if subject is dark  
or low contrast.  
FPS rate + AF  
Focus  
Photos can only be taken when in-focus indicator () is displayed.  
Custom Setting a2: AF-S Mode Priority  
This option controls whether photographs can  
be taken only when the camera is in focus (focus  
priority) or whenever the shutter-release button is  
pressed (release priority) in single-servo AF. High-  
light a2 AF-S mode priority in the second level  
CSM MENU  
a2 AF-S priority  
selection  
Focus  
OK  
Release  
of the CSM menu (  
171) and press the multi  
selector to the right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Focus  
(default)  
Photos can only be taken when in-focus indicator () is displayed.  
Release  
Photos can be taken whenever shutter-release button is pressed.  
176  
Custom Setting a3: Group Dynamic AF  
This option controls how focus areas are grouped  
CSM MENU  
a3 Pattern selection in  
Group Dynamic AF  
in group dynamic-AF (  
76) and whether the  
camera gives priority to the subject in the center  
focus area of the selected group. Highlight a3  
Group dynamic AF in the second level of the  
CSM menu ( 171) and press the multi selector  
to the right. Press the multi selector up or down  
to highlight an option, then press to the right to  
make a selection.  
Pattern 1  
Closest subject  
Center area  
Pattern 2  
OK  
Closest subject  
Center are  
Option  
Description  
Focus areas are grouped in pattern 1 ( 178). Camera automati-  
cally selects focus area containing subject closest to camera in cur-  
rent focus area group. If subject moves out of selected focus area,  
camera will focus based on information from other focus areas in  
same group.  
Pattern 1/  
Closest subject  
(default)  
Focus areas are grouped in pattern 1 (  
178). Camera focuses  
on subject in center focus area of selected group. Because camera  
does not have to select focus area, less time is required for focus  
operation. If subject moves out of center focus area, camera will  
focus based on information from other focus areas in same group.  
Center focus area of selected group is highlighted in top control  
panel.  
Pattern 1/  
Center area  
Pattern 2/  
As for Pattern 1/Closest subject, except that focus areas are  
Closest subject grouped in pattern 2 (  
Pattern 2/ As for Pattern 1/Center area, except that focus areas are  
Center area grouped in pattern 2 ( 178).  
178).  
177  
Focus areas are grouped as follows (illustrations show the display in the top  
control panel):  
Pattern 1  
Pattern 2*  
Top  
Top  
Left Center1 Center2 Right  
Bottom  
Closest  
subject  
Left Center Right  
Bottom  
Top  
Top  
Left Center1 Center2 Right  
Bottom  
Center  
area  
Left Center Right  
Bottom  
*The center focus-area group is selected by pressing the center of the multi selector  
once to activate the current center focus-area group and then pressing the center of  
the multi selector to toggle between “center 1” and “center 2.” “Center 2” is only  
available when Center AF area (the default option) is selected for Center button  
(Custom Setting f1)>Shooting mode.  
178  
Custom Setting a4: Disable Lock-on  
This option controls how autofocus adjusts to  
sudden large changes in the distance to the sub-  
ject. Highlight a4 Disable lock-on in the second  
CSM MENU  
a4 Disable focus tracking  
with Lock-On  
ON No  
OK  
level of the CSM menu (  
171) and press the  
multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector  
up or down to highlight an option, then press to  
the right to make a selection.  
OFF Yes  
Option  
Description  
Camera waits before adjusting focus when distance to subject  
changes abruptly. Prevents camera from refocusing when subject  
is briefly obscured by objects passing through frame.  
No  
(default)  
Camera immediately adjusts focus when distance to subject  
changes abruptly. Use when photographing series of subjects at  
varying distances in quick succession.  
Yes  
Custom Setting a5: AF Activation  
This option controls whether both the shutter-  
release button and the AF-ON buttons can be  
used to initiate autofocus or whether autofocus  
is only initiated when one of the AF-ON buttons  
is pressed. Highlight a5 AF activation in the sec-  
ond level of the CSM menu ( 171) and press the  
multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector  
up or down to highlight an option, then press to  
the right to make a selection.  
CSM MENU  
a5 AF activation  
ON Shutter/AF-ON  
OK  
OFF AF-ON only  
Option  
Shutter/AF-ON Autofocus can be performed with AF-ON buttons or by pressing  
(default) shutter-release button halfway.  
AF-ON only Autofocus can only be performed using AF-ON buttons.  
Description  
179  
Custom Setting a6: Focus Area Illum  
The options in this menu control when the focus  
areas are illuminated and for how long. Highlight  
a6 Focus area Illum in the second level of the  
CSM menu ( 171) and press the multi selector  
to the right. Press the multi selector up or down  
to highlight an option, then press the multi se-  
lector to the right.  
CSM MENU  
a6 Focus area Illumination  
Manual focus mode  
Continuous mode  
When selected  
Manual Focus Mode  
This option controls whether the active focus  
frame is displayed in manual focus mode. Press  
the multi selector up or down to highlight an op-  
tion, then press to the right to make a selection.  
CSM MENU  
a6 Focus area Illumination  
Manual focus mode  
On  
Off  
OK  
Option  
Description  
On  
Active focus area displayed when shutter-  
(default) release button is pressed halfway.  
Focus areas not displayed in manual focus  
mode.  
Off  
Continuous Mode  
This option controls whether the active focus  
frame is displayed in CH (continuous high-speed)  
or CL (continuous low-speed) mode. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
CSM MENU  
a6 Focus area Illumination  
Continuous mode  
On  
Off  
OK  
Option  
Description  
Active focus area displayed in continuous  
mode.  
On  
(default)  
Focus areas not displayed in continuous  
mode.  
Off  
180  
When Selected  
This option determines how long the active focus  
frame is displayed when selected. Press the multi  
selector up or down to highlight an option, then  
press to the right to make a selection.  
CSM MENU  
a6 Focus area Illumination  
When selected  
0.2 s  
1 s  
OK  
Option  
Description  
0.2s  
(default)  
Active focus area displayed for 0.2s.  
Active focus area displayed for 1s.  
1s  
Custom Setting a7: Focus Area  
By default, the focus-area display is bounded by  
the four outer focus areas so that, for example,  
pressing the multi selector up when the top focus  
area is selected has no effect. Focus-area selec-  
tion can be changed to “wrap around” from top  
to bottom, bottom to top, right to left, and left  
to right. Highlight a7 Focus area in the second  
CSM MENU  
a7 Focus area select  
OFF No wrap  
OK  
ON Wrap  
level of the CSM menu (  
171) and press the  
multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight  
an option, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
No wrap  
(default)  
Wrap-around disabled.  
Wrap-around enabled.  
Wrap  
181  
Custom Setting a8: Vertical AF-ON  
This option determines what functions are as-  
signed to the AF-ON button for vertical shooting.  
Highlight a8 Vertical AF-ON in the second level  
CSM MENU  
a8 Vertical AF-ON button  
function  
+
AF-ON Focus aOK  
of the CSM menu (  
171) and press the multi  
AF-ON  
+
AE/AF-L Focus area  
selector to the right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
AE/AF-L  
Focus area  
Option  
Description  
AF-ON+  
Focus area  
(default)  
Pressing vertical AF-ON button initiates autofocus. Focus area can  
be selected by pressing vertical AF-ON button and rotating sub-  
command dial.  
AF-ON  
Pressing vertical AF-ON button initiates autofocus.  
Pressing vertical AF-ON button locks focus and exposure. Focus  
area can be selected by pressing vertical AF-ON button and rotat-  
ing sub-command dial.  
AE/AF-L+  
Focus area  
AE/AF-L  
Pressing vertical AF-ON button locks focus and exposure.  
Vertical AF-ON button controls focus-area selection only. Focus  
area can be selected by pressing vertical AF-ON button and rotat-  
ing sub-command dial.  
Focus area  
Custom Setting b1: ISO Auto  
If On is selected for this option, the camera will  
automatically adjust sensitivity (ISO equivalency)  
if the limits of the camera exposure system are  
exceeded at the sensitivity selected by the user  
(exposure modes P, S, and A) or if optimal expo-  
sure can not be achieved at the shutter speed and  
aperture selected in manual exposure mode. If  
CSM MENU  
b1 ISO auto Control  
OFF Off  
OK  
ON On  
sensitivity is set to HI-1 (approximately equivalent to ISO 3200) or HI-2 (ap-  
proximately equivalent to ISO 6400), this option is automatically set to Off  
and can not be adjusted.  
Noise  
Noise is more likely to appear in photographs taken at higher sensitivities.  
182  
Highlight b1 ISO auto in the second level of the CSM menu ( 171) and  
press the multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to  
highlight an option, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Off Sensitivity remains fixed at value selected by user, regardless of whether  
(default) optimal exposure can be achieved at current exposure settings.  
When optimal exposure can not be achieved at sensitivity selected by user,  
sensitivity is adjusted to compensate, to minimum approximately equiv-  
alent to ISO 200 and maximum approximately equivalent to ISO 1600.  
On  
Sensitivity can not be set to HI-1 or HI-2 while this option is in effect.  
When On is selected, the rear control-  
panel display shows ISO-AUTO. ISO-A  
appears in the viewfinder sidebar.  
Custom Setting b2: ISO Step Value  
This option determines whether adjustments to  
CSM MENU  
b2 ISO step value  
sensitivity (ISO equivalency) are made in incre-  
1
ments equivalent to 3 EV (1/3 step, the default  
1/3 step  
1/2 step  
1 step  
OK  
option), ½EV (1/2 step), or 1EV (1 step). High-  
light b2 ISO step value in the second level of the  
CSM menu ( 171) and press the multi selector  
to the right. Press the multi selector up or down  
to highlight an option, then press to the right to  
make a selection.  
Bank Select  
If a shooting menu bank in which ISO has been set to  
or  
is chosen after  
On is selected for Custom Setting b1, sensitivity (ISO equivalency) will not be adjusted  
automatically. Sensitivity will also not be adjusted automatically if a Custom Settings  
bank in which On is selected for Custom Setting b1 is chosen after ISO has been set  
to  
or  
.
CH Mode  
When Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto) is on and sensitivity is altered from the value se-  
lected by the user, the maximum shooting speed in CH (continuous high-speed) mode  
is seven frames per second.  
183  
Custom Setting b3: EV Step  
This option determines whether adjustments to  
shutter speed, aperture, and bracketing are made  
in increments equivalent to 3 EV (1/3 step, the  
default option), ½EV (1/2 step), or 1EV (1 step).  
Highlight b3 EV step in the second level of the  
CSM menu ( 171) and press the multi selector  
to the right. Press the multi selector up or down  
to highlight an option, then press to the right to  
make a selection.  
CSM MENU  
b3 EV steps for exposure  
control  
1
1/3 step  
1/2 step  
1 step  
OK  
Custom Setting b4: Exposure Comp. EV  
This option determines whether adjustments to  
exposure compensation are made in increments  
equivalent to 1 3 EV (1/3 step, the default option),  
½EV (1/2 step), or 1EV (1 step). Highlight b4  
Exposure comp. EV in the second level of the  
CSM menu ( 171) and press the multi selector  
to the right. Press the multi selector up or down  
to highlight an option, then press to the right to  
make a selection.  
CSM MENU  
b4 EV steps for exposure  
compensation  
1/3 step  
1/2 step  
1 step  
OK  
Custom Setting b5: Exposure Comp.  
This option controls whether the  
button is  
CSM MENU  
b5 Easy exposure  
compensation  
needed to set exposure compensation ( 97). If  
CMD Dial only is selected, the 0 at the center of  
the exposure display will blink even when expo-  
sure compensation is set to 0.  
[+  
]
OFF  
/
& CMD Dial OK  
ON CMD Dial only  
184  
Highlight b5 Exposure comp. in the second level of the CSM menu ( 171)  
and press the multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down  
to highlight an option, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Exposure compensation set by pressing  
main command dial.  
button and rotating  
[+/-] & CMD Dial  
(default)  
Exposure compensation set by rotating command dial only. Dial  
used depends on option selected for Custom Setting f5.  
Custom Setting f5  
Off  
On  
CMD Dial only  
P
S
Sub-command dial  
Sub-command dial  
Main command dial  
Sub-command dial  
Main command dial  
Sub-command dial  
A
M
N/A  
Custom Setting b6: Center Weight  
When calculating exposure, center-weighted me-  
tering assigns the greatest weight to a circle in  
the center of the frame. The diameter (φ) of this  
circle can be selected from 6, 8, 10, and 13mm  
(the default option is 8mm). Highlight b6 Center  
weight in the second level of the CSM menu (  
171) and press the multi selector to the right.  
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight  
an option, then press to the right to make a selec-  
tion.  
CSM MENU  
b6 Center weight area  
6
8
10  
13  
ø 6mm  
ø 8mm  
ø10mm  
ø13mm  
Average  
OK  
Non-CPU Lenses  
The option chosen for Custom Setting b6 applies only to CPU lenses. When a non-CPU  
lens is attached, the size of the area assigned the greatest weight in center-weighted  
metering is 8mm, regardless of the option selected for Custom Setting b6 or for the  
Non-CPU lens data option in the shooting menu.  
185  
Custom Setting c1: AE Lock  
This option controls whether exposure locks while  
the shutter-release button is pressed halfway.  
Highlight c1 AE Lock in the second level of the  
CSM menu ( 171) and press the multi selector  
to the right. Press the multi selector up or down  
to highlight an option, then press to the right to  
make a selection.  
CSM MENU  
c1 AE Lock buttons  
OFF AE-L/AF-L Button OK  
+
ON  
Release Button  
Option  
Description  
AE-L/AF-L Button  
Exposure can only be locked by pressing AE-L/AF-L button.  
(default)  
Exposure can be locked by pressing AE-L/AF-L button or by  
pressing shutter-release button halfway.  
+Release Button  
Custom Setting c2: AE-L/AF-L  
This option controls the behavior of the AE-L/  
AF-L button. Highlight c2 AE-L/AF-L in the sec-  
ond level of the CSM menu ( 171) and press the  
multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector  
up or down to highlight an option, then press to  
the right to make a selection.  
CSM MENU  
c2 Assignment of  
AE-L/AF-L button  
AE/AF Lock  
AE Lock only  
AE Lock hold/reset  
AE Lock hold  
AF Lock  
OK  
Option  
Description  
Both focus and exposure lock while AE-L/AF-L button is pressed.  
AE/AF Lock  
(default)  
AE Lock only Exposure locks while AE-L/AF-L button is pressed. Focus is unaffected.  
Exposure locks when AE-L/AF-L button is pressed and remains  
locked until button is pressed again, shutter is released or exposure  
meters turn off.  
AE Lock  
hold/reset  
AE Lock  
hold  
Exposure locks when AE-L/AF-L button is pressed and remains locked  
until button is pressed again or exposure meters turn off.  
AF Lock  
Focus locks while AE-L/AF-L button is pressed. Exposure is unaffected.  
186  
Custom Setting c3: Auto Meter-Off  
This option controls how long the camera con-  
tinues to meter exposure when no operations are  
performed: 4s, 6s (the default option), 8s, or 16s  
or until the camera is turned off (No limit). High-  
light c3 Auto meter-off in the second level of the  
CSM menu ( 171) and press the multi selector  
to the right. Press the multi selector up or down  
to highlight an option, then press to the right to  
make a selection. Choose a shorter meter-off  
delay for longer battery life.  
CSM MENU  
c3 Auto meter-off delay  
4 s  
6 s  
8 s  
OK  
16 s  
No limit  
Custom Setting c4: Self-Timer  
CSM MENU  
This option controls the length of the shutter-  
release delay in self-timer mode. Shutter-release  
can be delayed by approximately 2s, 5s, 10s (the  
default option), or 20s. Highlight c4 Self-timer  
c4 Self-timer delay  
2 s  
5 s  
in the second level of the CSM menu (  
171)  
10 s  
20 s  
OK  
and press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
Custom Setting c5: Monitor Off  
CSM MENU  
This option controls how long the monitor remains  
on when no operations are performed: 10s, 20s  
(the default option), 1 minute, 5 minutes, or 10  
minutes. Highlight c5 Monitor off in the second  
c5 Monitor off delay  
10 s  
20 s  
1 m  
OK  
level of the CSM menu (  
171) and press the  
5 m  
10 m  
multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector  
up or down to highlight an option, then press to  
the right to make a selection. Choose a shorter  
monitor-off delay for longer battery life.  
The EH-6 AC Adapter  
When the camera is powered by an optional EH-6 AC adapter, exposure meters will  
not turn off and the monitor will only power off after ten minutes, regardless of the  
options chosen for Custom Settings c3 (Auto meter-off) and c5 (Monitor off).  
187  
Custom Setting d1: Shooting Speed  
This option determines the rate at which photo-  
graphs can be taken in CL (continuous low-speed)  
mode. Shooting speed can be set to values be-  
tween 1 and 7 frames per second (fps); the de-  
fault value is 3fps. Highlight d1 Shooting speed  
CSM MENU  
d1 CL-Mode shooting speed  
7 fps  
6 fps  
5 fps  
4 fps  
3 fps  
2 fps  
1 fps  
OK  
in the second level of the CSM menu (  
172)  
and press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
Custom Setting d2: Maximum Shots  
The maximum number of shots that can be taken  
in a single burst in continuous mode can be set to  
the following values:  
CSM MENU  
d2 C-Mode max. shots  
• Compressed NEF (RAW)+JPEG: 1–24  
• Uncompressed NEF (RAW)+JPEG: 1–25  
• Compressed NEF (RAW: 1–25  
• Uncompressed NEF (RAW): 1–26  
• TIFF (RGB): 1–35  
OK  
40  
• JPEG: 1–40  
Highlight d2 Maximum shots in the second level of the CSM menu ( 172)  
and press the multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down  
to highlight an option, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Shutter Speed  
At slow shutter speeds, the shooting speed may be slower than the value selected for  
Custom Setting d1.  
Interval Timer Photography  
During interval timer photography, Custom Setting d1 also determines the shooting  
speed in S (single frame) and M-UP modes.  
188  
Custom Setting d3: Exp. Delay Mode  
Shutter release can be delayed until about 0.4s  
after the shutter-release button is pressed, reduc-  
ing camera shake in situations in which the least  
camera movement could result in blurred photo-  
graphs (for example, microscope photography).  
Highlight d3 Exp. delay mode in the second  
CSM MENU  
d3 Exposure delay mode  
OFF Off  
OK  
ON On  
level of the CSM menu (  
172) and press the  
multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector  
up or down to highlight an option, then press to  
the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Off  
(default)  
Shutter is released when shutter-release button is pressed.  
On  
Shutter is released about 0.4s after shutter-release button is pressed.  
189  
Custom Setting d4: Long Exp. NR  
This option controls whether photographs taken  
at shutter speeds slower than about ½s are  
processed to reduce “noise” (randomly-spaced,  
brightly-colored pixels that appear at slow shut-  
ter speeds, particularly in shadows). Highlight  
d4 Long Exp. NR in the second level of the CSM  
menu ( 172) and press the multi selector to the  
right. Press the multi selector up or down to high-  
light an option, then press to the right to make a  
selection.  
CSM MENU  
d4 Long exposure  
noise reduction  
OFF Off  
OK  
ON On  
Option  
Description  
Off  
(default)  
Noise reduction off; camera functions normally.  
Noise reduction takes effect at shutter speeds of  
about ½s or slower. Time required to process  
images more than doubles. During processing,  
blinks in shutter-speed and aper-  
On  
ture displays. Next photo can be taken when  
is no longer displayed.  
Playback  
If photographs are played back while they are being processed to reduce noise, the  
image that is displayed in the monitor may not show the effects of noise reduction.  
The Memory Buffer  
The maximum number of shots that can be stored in the memory buffer when noise  
reduction is on is as follows:  
• Compressed NEF+JPEG Fine: 14  
• Compressed NEF+JPEG Normal: 14  
• Compressed NEF+JPEG Basic: 14  
• Compressed NEF (RAW): 15  
• TIFF (RGB): 15  
• Uncompressed NEF+JPEG Fine: 15  
• Uncompressed NEF+JPEG Normal: 15  
• Uncompressed NEF+JPEG Basic: 15  
• Uncompressed NEF (RAW): 16  
• JPEG Fine: 30  
• JPEG Normal: 30  
• JPEG Basic: 30  
190  
Custom Setting d5: File No. Seq.  
When a photograph is taken, the camera names  
the file new by adding one to the last file number  
used. This option controls whether file number-  
ing continues from the last number used when  
a new folder is created, the memory card is for-  
matted, or a new memory card is inserted in the  
camera. Highlight d5 File No. Seq. in the second  
CSM MENU  
d5 File number sequence  
OK  
OFF Off  
ON  
On  
Reset  
level of the CSM menu (  
172) and press the  
multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight  
an option, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Off File numbering reset to 0001 when new folder is created, memory card is  
(default) formatted or new memory card is inserted in camera.  
When new folder is created, memory card is formatted, or new memory  
card inserted in camera, file numbering continues from last number used or  
from largest number in current folder, whichever is higher. If photograph  
On  
is taken when current folder contains photograph numbered 9999, new  
folder will be created automatically and file numbering will begin again  
from 0001.  
As for On, except that next photograph taken is assigned file number by  
adding one to largest file number in current folder. If selected folder con-  
tains no photographs, file numbering reset to 0001.  
Reset  
191  
Custom Setting d6: Cntrl Panel/Finder  
The options in this menu control the information  
displayed in the viewfinder and rear control panel.  
Highlight d6 Cntrl panel/finder in the second  
CSM MENU  
d6 Control panel/  
viewfinder display  
Rear control panel  
level of the CSM menu (  
172) and press the  
multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector  
up or down to highlight an option, then press the  
multi selector to the right.  
Viewfinder display  
Rear Control Panel  
This option controls whether the rear control  
panel shows sensitivity (ISO equivalency) or the  
number of exposures remaining. Press the multi  
selector up or down to highlight an option, then  
press to the right to make a selection.  
CSM MENU  
d6 Control panel/  
viewfinder display  
Rear control panel  
ISO  
OK  
Exposures remaining  
Option  
Description  
Rear control panel shows sensitivity.  
ISO  
(default)  
Exposures Rear control panel shows number of exposures remaining. Sensitivity  
remaining displayed only while ISO button is pressed.  
192  
Viewfinder Display  
This option controls whether the viewfinder  
shows the frame count or number of exposures  
remaining (note that regardless of the option se-  
lected, the number of frames that can be stored  
in the memory buffer will be shown while the  
shutter-release button is pressed). Press the multi  
selector up or down to highlight an option, then  
press to the right to make a selection.  
CSM MENU  
d6 Control panel/  
viewfinder display  
Viewfinder display  
Frame count  
OK  
Exposures remaining  
Option  
Description  
Viewfinder shows frame count.  
Viewfinder shows number of exposures remaining.  
Frame count  
(default)  
Exposures  
remaining  
Custom Setting d7: Illumination  
This option controls the control panel backlights  
(LCD illuminators). Highlight d7 Illumination in  
the second level of the CSM menu ( 172) and  
press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
CSM MENU  
d7 LCD Illumination  
OFF Lamp on switch  
OK  
ON Any button  
Option  
Description  
Lamp on switch Control panels illuminate only while power switch is rotated to  
(default)  
position.  
Control panels illuminate whenever exposure meters are active  
(note that this increases drain on battery).  
Any button  
193  
Custom Setting e1: Flash Sync Speed  
This option controls flash sync speed. Options  
CSM MENU  
e1 Flash sync speed setting  
range from ½50 s (1/250, the default setting) and  
1
60 s (1/60). To enable auto FP high-speed sync  
1/250  
OK  
(
)
1/250 FP auto  
1/200  
when using an SB-800 Speedlight, select 1/250  
(FP auto) (if the SB-800 is not attached when this  
option is selected, flash sync speed will be set to  
½50 s). When the camera shows a shutter speed  
of ½50 s in exposure mode P or A, Auto FP High-  
Speed Sync will be activated if the actual shutter  
speed is faster than ½50 s.  
1/160  
1/125  
1/100  
Highlight e1 Flash sync speed in the second level of the CSM menu (  
172) and press the multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or  
down to highlight an option, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Custom Setting e2: Flash Shutter Speed  
This option determines the slowest shutter speed  
possible when using a flash in programmed auto  
CSM MENU  
e2 Slowest speed when  
using flash  
or aperture-priority auto exposure mode (in  
1/60  
1/30  
1/15  
1/8  
OK  
shutter-priority auto or manual exposure mode,  
shutter speeds can be set to values as slow as  
30s regardless of the setting chosen). Options  
1/4  
1/2  
1
range from 60 s (1/60, the default setting) and  
30s (30").  
Highlight e2 Flash shutter speed in the second level of the CSM menu (  
172) and press the multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or  
down to highlight an option, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Fixing Shutter Speed at the Flash Sync Speed Limit  
To x shutter speed at the sync speed limit in shutter-priority auto or manual exposure  
modes, select next the shutter speed after the slowest possible shutter speed (30s or  
). An X will be displayed in the flash sync indicator in the top control panel.  
194  
Custom Setting e3: AA Flash Mode  
This option controls whether flash level is auto-  
matically adjusted for aperture when an external  
exposure meter is used with an SB-80DX or SB-  
28DX Speedlight (in the case of the SB-800, the  
flash mode chosen with the Speedlight is used re-  
gardless of the option chosen for Custom Setting  
e3). Highlight e3 AA flash mode in the second  
CSM MENU  
e3 AA flash mode  
ON On  
OK  
OFF Off  
level of the CSM menu (  
172) and press the  
multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight  
an option, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
On  
Flash level automatically adjusted for aperture when external exposure me-  
(default) ter is used with SB-80DX or SB-28DX Speedlight (auto aperture).*  
Off Aperture specified manually using Speedlight controls (non-TTL auto).  
*To use auto aperture with non-CPU lenses, specify maximum aperture of lens using  
Non-CPU lens data option in shooting menu.  
Custom Setting e4: Modeling Flash  
This option determines whether the SB-800 emits  
a modeling flash when the depth-of-field preview  
CSM MENU  
e4 Preview button  
activates modeling flash  
button is pressed. Highlight e4 Modeling flash  
ON On  
OK  
in the second level of the CSM menu (  
172)  
and press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
OFF Off  
Option  
Description  
SB-800 emits modeling flash when depth-of-field is previewed (  
On  
(default)  
106).  
Off No modeling flash emitted when depth-of-field preview button is pressed.  
195  
Custom Setting e5: Auto BKT Set  
This option controls what settings are affected  
when auto bracketing is in effect. Highlight e5  
Auto BKT set in the second level of the CSM  
CSM MENU  
e5 Auto bracketing set  
AE & flash  
AE only  
OK  
menu (  
172) and press the multi selector to  
the right. Press the multi selector up or down  
to highlight an option, then press to the right to  
make a selection.  
Flash only  
WB bracketing  
Option  
Description  
AE & flash  
(default)  
Camera performs exposure and flash-level bracketing.  
AE only  
Camera performs exposure bracketing only.  
Camera performs flash-level bracketing only.  
Flash only  
WB bracketing Camera performs white balance bracketing.  
White Balance Bracketing  
White balance bracketing is not available at image quality settings of NEF (RAW) or  
NEF+JPEG.  
196  
Custom Setting e6: Manual Mode Bkting  
This option controls what settings are affected  
when AE & flash or AE only is selected for  
Custom Setting e5 in manual exposure mode.  
Highlight e6 Manual mode bkting in the sec-  
ond level of the CSM menu ( 172) and press the  
multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector  
up or down to highlight an option, then press to  
the right to make a selection.  
CSM MENU  
e6 Auto bracketing in  
M exposure mode  
Flash/speed  
OK  
Flash/speed/aperture  
Flash/aperture  
Flash only  
Option  
Description  
Flash/speed Camera varies shutter speed (Custom Setting e5 set to AE only) or  
(default)  
shutter speed and flash level (Custom Setting e5 set to AE & flash).  
Camera varies shutter speed and aperture (Custom Setting e5 set to  
AE only) or shutter speed, aperture, and flash level (Custom Setting  
e5 set to AE & flash).  
Flash/speed/  
aperture  
Camera varies aperture (Custom Setting e5 set to AE only) or aper-  
ture speed and flash level (Custom Setting e5 set to AE & flash).  
Flash/  
aperture  
Flash only Camera varies flash level only.  
• If no flash is attached when Custom Setting b1 (ISO auto) is on, camera will vary  
sensitivity only, regardless of setting selected.  
• Flash bracketing performed only with i-TTL or AA flash control.  
Custom Setting e7: Auto BKT Order  
CSM MENU  
This option controls the order in which bracketing  
e7 Auto bracketing order  
is performed. Highlight e7 Auto BKT order in  
the second level of the CSM menu ( 172) and  
>
>
MTR Under OveOr K  
press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
>
>
Under MTR Over  
Option  
MTR>Under>Over Bracketing performed in order described in “Bracketing” (  
(default) 98).  
Under>MTR>Over Bracketing proceeds in order from lowest to highest value.  
Description  
197  
Custom Setting e8: Auto BKT Selection  
This option controls how the bracketing program  
is selected. Highlight e8 Auto BKT selection in  
the second level of the CSM menu ( 172) and  
press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
CSM MENU  
e8 Auto Bracketing  
Selection method  
Manual value selectOK  
Preset value select  
Option  
Description  
Pressing  
button, rotate main command dial to select  
Manual value select  
number of shots, sub-command dial to select bracketing  
increment.  
(default)  
Press  
button and rotate main command dial to turn  
button and rotate sub-  
bracketing on and off. Press  
Preset value select  
command dial to select number of shots and bracketing  
increment.  
Custom Setting f1: Center Button  
This option determines what operations can be  
performed by pressing the center of the multi se-  
lector. Highlight f1 Center button in the second  
CSM MENU  
f1 Multi selector  
Center button  
Shooting mode  
level of the CSM menu (  
172) and press the  
multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector  
up or down to highlight an option, then press the  
multi selector to the right.  
Playback mode  
Shooting Mode  
This option controls what operation can be per-  
formed by pressing the center of the multi se-  
lector when the camera is in shooting mode.  
CSM MENU  
f1 Multi selector  
Center button  
Shooting mode  
OK  
Center AF area  
Illuminate AF area  
Not used  
198  
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Pressing center of multi selector selects center focus area or center  
focus-area group (group dynamic-AF). If Pattern 2 is selected for  
Custom Setting a3 (Group dynamic AF), center of multi selector  
can be used to toggle between center focus area groups.  
Center AF area  
(default)  
Illuminate AF Pressing center of multi selector illuminates active focus area or  
area  
focus-area group (group dynamic-AF) in viewfinder.*  
Pressing center of multi selector has no effect when camera is in  
shooting mode.*  
Not used  
*Center of multi selector can not be used to toggle between center focus-area groups  
when Pattern 2 is selected for Custom Setting a3 (Group dynamic AF).  
Playback Mode  
This option controls what operation is performed  
when the center of the multi selector is pressed  
in playback mode. Press the multi selector up or  
CSM MENU  
f1 Multi selector  
Center button  
Playback mode  
OK  
Thmbnail on/off  
Histogram on/off  
Zoom on/off  
down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Thumbnail on/off Press center of multi selector to toggle between single-image  
(default)  
and thumbnail playback.  
Press center of multi selector to turn histogram display on and  
off.  
Histogram on/off  
Press center of multi selector to zoom  
in on image, press again to return to  
full-frame display or thumbnail play-  
back. When this option is selected,  
menu of zoom settings shown at  
right is displayed. Choose from 2×  
zoom, 3× zoom, and 4× zoom.*  
CSM MENU  
f1 Multi selector  
Center button  
Zoom on/off  
OK  
2x zoom  
3x zoom  
4x zoom  
Zoom on/off  
*Zoom settings refer to large images.  
199  
Custom Setting f2: Multi Selector  
If desired, the multi selector can be used to ac-  
tivate the exposure meters or initiate autofocus.  
Highlight f2 Multi selector in the second level  
CSM MENU  
f2 When multi selector is  
pressed:  
Do nothing  
OK  
of the CSM menu (  
172) and press the multi  
Reset mtr-off delay  
Initiate autofocus  
selector to the right. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Do nothing  
(default)  
Multi selector does not activate exposure meters or initiate  
autofocus.  
Reset mtr-off delay Pressing multi selector activates exposure meters.  
In AF-S or AF-C mode, pressing multi selector activates expo-  
sure meters. Camera focuses while multi selector is pressed.  
Initiate autofocus  
Custom Setting f3: PhotoInfo/Playback  
By default, pressing the multi selector up or down  
during playback displays the other images on the  
CSM MENU  
f3 Role of Multi Selector  
in Full-Frame Playback  
memory card, while pressing the multi selector  
OFF Info  
/PB  
/PB  
OK  
left or right changes the photo information dis-  
played. These roles can be reversed using Custom  
Setting f3. Highlight f3 PhotoInfo/Playback in  
the second level of the CSM menu ( 172) and  
press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
ON Info  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option, then press to the right to  
make a selection.  
Option  
/PB▲▼  
Description  
Press multi selector up or down to display additional images, left or  
right to change photo info displayed.  
Info  
(default)  
Press multi selector up or down to change photo info displayed,  
left or right to display additional images.  
Info▲▼/PB  
200  
Custom Setting f4: FUNC. Button  
This option controls the function performed by  
the FUNC. button. Highlight f4 FUNC. Button  
CSM MENU  
f4 Assign FUNC. Button  
in the second level of the CSM menu (  
172)  
FV Lock  
OK  
FV Lock/Lens data  
1 step spd/apeture  
Same as AE-L/AF-L  
Flash off  
and press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option,  
then press to the right to make a selection.  
Bracketing burst  
Option  
Description  
FV Lock If SB-800 Speedlight is attached, flash value locks while FUNC. button  
(default) is pressed.  
If SB-800 Speedlight is attached and on, flash value locks while FUNC.  
button is pressed. Otherwise focal length of non-CPU lens can be set  
with FUNC. button and main command dial, maximum aperture with  
FV Lock/  
Lens data  
FUNC. button and sub-command dial (  
124).  
If FUNC. button is pressed when rotating command dials, changes to  
shutter speed (exposure modes S and M) and aperture (exposure modes  
A and M) are made in increments of 1EV.  
1 step  
spd/  
aperture  
Same as  
AE-L/AF-L  
FUNC. button performs same functions as AE-L/AF-L button.  
To temporarily disable flash, press shutter-release button while FUNC  
button is pressed.  
Flash off  
While FUNC. button is pressed, all shots in exposure or flash bracketing  
program will be taken each time shutter-release button is pressed. In  
continuous high-speed and continuous low-speed modes, camera will  
repeat bracketing burst while shutter-release button is held down. If  
white-balance bracketing is selected, camera will take photos at up to  
8fps (single or continuous high-speed mode) or 1–7fps (continuous low-  
speed mode) and perform white balance bracketing on each frame.  
Bracket-  
ing burst  
Matrix  
metering  
Matrix metering activated while FUNC. button is pressed.  
Center-weighted metering activated while FUNC. button is pressed.  
Spot metering activated while FUNC. button is pressed.  
Center-  
weighted  
Spot  
metering  
201  
Custom Setting f5: Command Dials  
This option controls the operation of the main  
and sub-command dials. Highlight f5 Command  
dials in the second level of the CSM menu (  
172) and press the multi selector to the right.  
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an  
option, then press the multi selector to the right.  
CSM MENU  
f5 Customize command dials  
Rotate direction  
Change Main/Sub  
Aperture setting  
Menus and Playback  
Rotate Direction  
This option controls the direction of all com-  
mand dials when setting flexible program, shutter  
speed, easy exposure compensation, exposure  
mode, exposure compensation value, bracketing  
increment, and flash sync mode. Press the multi  
selector up or down to highlight an option, then  
press to the right to make a selection.  
CSM MENU  
f5 Customize command dials  
Rotate direction  
Normal  
OK  
Reverse  
Option  
Description  
Normal  
(default)  
Normal command dial operation.  
Reverses rotation of command dials.  
Reverse  
202  
Change Main/Sub  
This option can be used to exchange the functions  
of the main and sub-command dials when setting  
shutter speed and aperture. Press the multi se-  
lector up or down to highlight an option, then  
press to the right to make a selection.  
CSM MENU  
f5 Customize command dials  
Change Main/Sub  
Off  
On  
OK  
Option  
Description  
Off  
(default)  
Main command controls shutter speed, sub-command dial con-  
trols aperture.  
Main command dial controls aperture, sub-command controls  
shutter speed.  
On  
Aperture Setting  
This option controls whether changes to aperture  
are made using the lens aperture ring or the com-  
mand dials. Regardless of the setting chosen,  
the lens ring must be used to set aperture for  
non-CPU lenses and the command dials to set  
aperture for type G lenses not equipped with an  
aperture ring. Press the multi selector up or down  
to highlight an option, then press to the right to  
make a selection.  
CSM MENU  
f5 Customize command dials  
Aperture setting  
Sub-command dial OK  
Aperture ring  
Option  
Description  
Sub-command dial Aperture can only be adjusted using sub-command dial (or  
(default)  
main command dial if Change Main/Sub is On).  
Aperture can only be adjusted using lens aperture ring. Cam-  
era aperture display shows aperture in increments of 1EV.  
This option is selected automatically when non-CPU lens is  
attached.  
Aperture ring  
203  
Menus and Playback  
This option controls the functions performed  
by the command dials during playback or when  
menus are displayed. Press the multi selector up  
or down to highlight an option, then press to the  
right to make a selection.  
CSM MENU  
f5 Customize command dials  
Menus and Playback  
Off  
On  
OK  
Option  
Description  
Off Multi selector used to choose picture displayed, highlight thumbnails, and  
(default) navigate menus.  
Main command dial performs same function as pressing multi selector  
left or right. Sub-command dial performs same function as pressing multi  
selector up or down.  
Single-image playback: main command dial is used to choose picture  
displayed, sub-command dial to display additional photo information.  
Thumbnail playback: main command dial moves cursor left or right, sub-  
command dial moves cursor up or down.  
On  
Menu navigation: main command dial moves highlight bar up or down.  
Rotate sub-command dial to right to display sub-menu, to left to return  
to previous menu. To make selection, press multi selector to right, press  
center of multi selector, or press  
button.  
Custom Setting f6: Buttons and Dials  
Normally, changes to settings that involve both a  
command dial and a button are made by rotating  
the command dial while the button is held down.  
If desired, this can be changed so that the buttons  
do not have to be held down while the command  
dial is rotated.  
CSM MENU  
f6 Setting method for  
buttons and dials  
Default  
Hold  
OK  
204  
Highlight f6 Buttons and dials in the second level of the CSM menu (  
172) and press the multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or  
down to highlight an option, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
Default Changes to settings made by rotating command dial while button is held  
(default) down.  
Settings can be changed by rotating command dial even after button is re-  
leased. To put change into effect and return to normal operation, press but-  
ton again, press shutter-release button halfway, or press  
,
,
,
,
Hold  
ISO, QUAL, or WB button. Unless auto meter off is set to No limit or the  
camera is powered by optional EH-6 AC adapter, normal functioning will be  
restored automatically if no operations are performed for about 20s.  
Custom Setting f7: No CF Card?  
This option can be used to enable the shutter  
release when no memory card is inserted in the  
camera. Note that when photographs are being  
captured to a computer using Nikon Capture 4  
Camera Control, photographs are not recorded to  
the camera memory card and the shutter release  
will be enabled regardless of the setting chosen  
for this option.  
CSM MENU  
f7 Disable shutter  
if no CF card  
ON On  
OK  
OFF Off  
Highlight f7 No CF card? in the second level of the CSM menu ( 172) and  
press the multi selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to  
highlight an option, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
On  
(default)  
Shutter-release button disabled when no memory card is inserted.  
Off Shutter-release button enabled even when no memory card is inserted.  
205  
The Setup Menu  
Camera Setup  
The setup menu contains three pages of options:  
SET UP  
Option  
Format  
Format  
LCD brightness  
Mirror lock-up*  
Video mode  
207  
208  
LCD brightness  
Mirror lock-up  
Video mode  
Date  
0
OFF  
Language  
Image comment  
Auto image rotation  
En  
OFF  
ON  
208  
209  
Date  
209  
SET UP  
Language  
209  
Voice memo  
Voice memo protect  
Voice memo button  
Audio output  
ON  
Image comment  
Auto image rotation  
Voice memo  
210–211  
211  
USB  
M
Dust Off ref photo  
Battery Info  
Wireless LAN  
212  
Voice memo protect  
Voice memo button  
Audio output  
USB  
212  
212  
SET UP  
212  
Voice memo protect  
Voice memo button  
Audio output  
USB  
Dust Off ref photo  
Battery Info  
ON  
213  
M
Dust Off ref photo  
214–215  
216  
Battery info  
Wireless LAN  
Firmware Version  
Wireless LAN†  
Firmware version  
217–219  
219  
*Available only when optional EH-6 AC adapter is con-  
nected.  
Available only when optional WT-1/WT-1A wireless  
transmitter is connected.  
Using the Multi Selector  
The multi selector can be used at any time when the monitor is on. The focus selector  
lock switch only takes effect when the monitor is off.  
206  
Format  
Memory cards must be formatted before first use.  
Formatting memory cards is also an effective way  
of deleting all pictures on the card. To format  
a memory card, highlight Format in the setup  
SET UP  
Format  
WARNING!  
ALL IMAGES  
WILL BE DELETED  
menu (  
206) and press the multi selector to  
No  
OK  
the right. Press the multi selector up or down to  
highlight one of the following options and then  
Yes  
press the  
button:  
Option  
Description  
No Exit without formatting memory card.  
Format memory card. Message shown at right  
displayed while formatting is in progress. Do  
not turn the camera off, remove the batteries  
SET UP  
Format  
Yes  
or memory card, or unplug the AC adapter  
(available separately) until formatting is com-  
plete and setup menu is displayed.  
FORMATTING  
During Formatting  
Do not remove the memory card, remove the battery, or unplug the AC adapt-  
er (available separately) while formatting is in progress.  
Before Formatting  
Formatting memory cards permanently deletes all data they contain, including  
hidden and protected pictures and any other data that may be on the card.  
Before formatting, be sure to transfer to a computer any pictures you would like to  
keep.  
FAT 32  
The D2H supports FAT 32, allowing use of memory cards with capacities of over 2GB.  
FAT 16 is used when reformatting cards already formatted in FAT 16.  
Two-Button Format  
Memory cards can also be formatted with the  
(
and ) buttons (  
23).  
207  
LCD Brightness  
To adjust monitor brightness, highlight LCD  
brightness in the setup menu ( 206) and press  
the multi selector to the right. The menu shown  
at right will be displayed. Press the multi selector  
up to increase brightness, down to decrease. The  
number to the right of the display indicates the  
current brightness level, with +2 the brightest set-  
ting and –2 the darkest. Press the multi selector  
to the right to complete the operation and return  
to the setup menu.  
SET UP  
LCD brightness  
OK  
0
Mirror Lock-up  
This option is used to lock the mirror in the up po-  
sition to allow inspection or cleaning of the low-  
pass filter that protects the LBCAST image sensor.  
See “Technical Notes: Caring for the Camera and  
Battery” ( 240).  
SET UP  
Mirror lock-up  
OFF OFF  
OK  
ON Image sensor cleaning  
Highlight Mirror lock-up in the setup menu ( 206) and press the multi  
selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an op-  
tion, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Option  
Description  
OFF  
Mirror functions normally.  
When shutter is released, mirror is locked in up position and blink-  
ing “– – – – – – ” is displayed in top control panel. Mirror will  
return to down position when camera is turned off. To ensure  
power is available to lower mirror, this option is only available when  
camera is powered by EH-6 AC adapter.  
Image sensor  
cleaning  
208  
Video Mode  
Before connecting your camera to a video device  
such as a television or VCR ( 222), choose a vid-  
eo mode setting that matches the video standard  
used in the device. Highlight Video mode in the  
setup menu ( 206) and press the multi selector  
to the right. Press the multi selector up or down  
to highlight an option, then press to the right to  
make a selection.  
SET UP  
Video mode  
NTSC  
PAL  
OK  
Option  
Description  
NTSC Use when connecting camera to NTSC devices.  
Use when connecting camera to PAL devices. Note that number of pixels in  
output is selectively reduced, causing drop in resolution.  
PAL  
Date  
Date is used to set the camera clock to the cur-  
rent date and time. See “First Steps: Step 4—Set  
the Time and Date” ( 19).  
SET UP  
Date  
Set  
OK  
Y
M
D
2003 08 30  
H
M
S
13 42 08  
Language  
Use the Language option to choose a language  
for camera menus and messages. See “First  
Steps: Step 3—Choose a Language” ( 18).  
SET UP  
Language  
De Deutsch  
En English  
Es Español  
Fr Français  
OK  
简体)  
日本語  
Video Output  
The default video standard varies with the country or region of purchase.  
209  
Image Comment  
Using this option, brief texts comment can be  
added to photographs as they are taken. Com-  
ments can be viewed when the photographs are  
displayed using the software provided with the  
camera or Nikon Capture 4. The first twelve let-  
ters of the comment are also visible on the fourth  
page of the photo information display ( 133).  
SET UP  
Image comment  
Done  
OK  
Input comment  
Attach comment  
Highlight Image comment in the setup menu ( 206) and press the multi  
selector to the right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an op-  
tion, then press to the right to make a selection.  
Done  
Put changes to settings into effect and exit to setup menu.  
Input Comment  
Highlight Input comment and press the multi selector to the right. The fol-  
lowing dialog will be displayed. Enter a comment as described below.  
SET UP  
cursor  
"
Input  
OK  
.
< =  
Keyboard area  
!
# $ % &  
'
(
)
*
+
:
,
;
Use multi selector to  
highlight letters, press  
center of multi selector  
to select.  
/
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9  
Comment area  
> ?@A B C D E F G H I J K L  
M N O P Q R S T U VWX Y Z  
_ a b c d e g h l m  
n o p q u v w x y z  
Comment appears here.  
To move cursor, press  
button and use multi  
selector.  
[
]
f
i
j
k
r
s
t
{
}
To move the cursor in the comment area, press the  
button and use the  
multi selector. To enter a new letter at the current cursor position, use the  
multi selector to highlight the desired character in the keyboard area and  
press the center of the multi selector. To delete the character at the current  
cursor position, press the  
changing the comment, press the  
button. To return to the setup menu without  
button.  
Comments can be up to thirty-six characters long. Any characters after the  
thirty-sixth will be deleted.  
After editing the comment, press  
to return to the image comment menu.  
210  
Attach Comment  
To add the comment to all subsequent photographs, highlight Attach com-  
ment in the input comment menu and press the multi selector to the right.  
A will appear in the box next to Attach comment; highlight Done and  
press the multi selector to the right to return to the setup menu.  
To prevent the comment from being added to photographs, highlight Attach  
comment in the input comment menu and press the multi selector to the  
right to remove the check from Attach comment, then highlight Done and  
press the multi selector to the right to return to the setup menu.  
Auto Image Rotation  
The D2H is equipped with a built-in sensor that  
detects camera orientation. Information from  
this sensor can be embedded in photographs as  
they are taken, allowing portrait (tall) orientation  
photographs to be rotated automatically when  
displayed in the software provided with the cam-  
era or Nikon Capture 4.  
SET UP  
Auto image rotation  
ON On  
OK  
OFF Off  
Option  
Description  
Camera records whether shots are in landscape (wide) orientation, portrait  
(tall) orientation with the camera rotated 90° clockwise, or portrait (tall)  
orientation with the camera rotated 90° counter-clockwise.*  
On  
(default)  
Landscape (wide)  
orientation  
Camera rotated 90°  
clockwise  
Camera rotated 90°  
counter-clockwise  
Camera orientation is not recorded. Nikon Capture 4 and supplied soft-  
ware display all photographs in landscape (wide) orientation.†  
Off  
*In CH (continuous high speed) and CL (continuous low speed) modes (  
70), ori-  
entation recorded for first shot applies to all images in same burst, even if camera  
orientation is changed during shooting.  
Camera may fail to record correct orientation in shots taken with lens pointing up or  
down. Choose Off to prevent camera from recording incorrect orientation.  
211  
Voice Memo  
Voice memo contains options for recording voice  
SET UP  
Voice memo  
memos in shooting mode. See “Voice Memos”  
(
139).  
Off  
OK  
On (auto and manual)  
Manual only  
Voice Memo Protect  
The option selected for Voice memo protect  
determines whether the voice memo for the last  
photograph recorded can be overwritten when  
the camera is in shooting mode. See “Voice  
Memos” ( 139).  
SET UP  
Voice memo protect  
ON On  
OK  
OFF Off  
Voice Memo Button  
This option controls operation of the button.  
See “Voice Memos” ( 139).  
SET UP  
Voice memo button  
Press and hold  
OK  
Press to start/stop  
Audio Output  
This menu contains output options for voice  
memos. See “Voice Memos” ( 139).  
SET UP  
Audio output  
Via speaker  
Via VIDEO OUT  
Off  
212  
USB  
Before connecting the camera to a computer via  
USB ( 223), select the appropriate USB option  
as determined by the computer operating system  
and whether the camera is being controlled from  
Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control or photographs  
are being transferred to the computer using the  
transfer function included with the software pro-  
vided with the camera.  
SET UP  
USB  
Mass Storage  
PTP  
OK  
Operating system  
Transfer  
Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control  
Windows XP Home Edition  
Windows XP Professional  
Choose PTP or  
Mass Storage  
Mac OS X  
Choose PTP  
Windows 2000 Professional  
Windows Millennium Edition (Me)  
Windows 98 Second Edition (SE)  
Choose  
Mass Storage  
Mac OS 9  
The default setting for USB is Mass Storage. To change the USB setting,  
highlight USB in the setup menu ( 206) and press the multi selector to the  
right. Press the multi selector up or down to highlight the desired option,  
then press the multi selector to the right.  
213  
Dust Off Ref Photo  
This option is used to acquire reference data for the Image Dust Off function  
in Nikon Capture (for more information on Image Dust Off, see the Nikon  
Capture 4 User’s Manual).  
Dust Off ref photo is only available when a CPU lens is mounted on  
1
2
the camera. We recommend using a lens with a focal length of at least  
50mm. If using a zoom lens, zoom in to the maximum telephoto posi-  
tion.  
Highlight Dust Off ref photo in the setup  
SET UP  
Dust Off ref photo  
menu (  
206) and press the multi selector  
to the right. The menu shown at right will be  
displayed.  
Start  
OK  
Press the multi selector to the right. Camera  
settings will automatically be adjusted for Im-  
age Dust Off. The message shown at right will  
SET UP  
Dust Off ref photo  
3
Take photo of  
featureless white  
object 10cm from  
lens. Lens will be  
set to infinity.  
be displayed, and  
viewfinder and control panels.  
will be displayed in the  
Top control panel  
Rear control panel  
Viewfinder  
To cancel the operation and return to the setup menu, press the  
but-  
ton or press the multi selector to the right. The operation will also be  
cancelled when the camera or monitor is turned off.  
Image Dust Off  
The Image Dust Off feature in Nikon Capture 4 (available separately) processes NEF  
(RAW) photographs to remove the effects of dust in the camera imaging system by  
comparing the images to the data acquired with Dust Off ref photo. It is not avail-  
able with TIFF (RGB) or JPEG images. The same reference data can be used for NEF  
(RAW) photographs taken with different lenses or at different apertures.  
214  
With the lens ten centimeters (four inches)  
4
5
from a bright, featureless white object, frame  
the object so that nothing else is visible in  
the viewfinder and press the shutter-release  
button halfway. In autofocus mode, focus  
will automatically be set to infinity; in manual  
focus mode, set focus to infinity manually before pressing the shutter-  
release button. If using the aperture ring to set aperture, choose the  
minimum setting (largest f/-number).  
Press the shutter-release button the rest of the  
way down to acquire Image Dust Off refer-  
ence data (note that noise reduction turns  
on automatically when the subject is poorly  
lit, increasing the amount of time needed to  
record the data). The monitor turns off when  
the shutter-release button is pressed.  
If the reference object is too bright or too  
dark, the camera may be unable to acquire  
Image Dust Off reference data and the mes-  
sage shown at right will be displayed. Choose  
another reference object and repeat the pro-  
cess from Step 3.  
SET UP  
Dust Off ref photo  
Take photo of  
INAPPROPRIATE  
EXPOSURE CONDITIONS  
lens. Lens will be  
set to infinity.  
Image Dust Off Reference Data  
Image Dust Off reference data are recorded to the  
memory card at an image quality of JPEG Fine and an  
image size of Large. When the resulting image is played  
back on the camera, a grid pattern is displayed and  
voice memos can not be recorded. Files created with  
Dust Off ref photo can not be viewed using computer  
imaging software.  
NDF  
Image dust off data  
100-1  
215  
Battery Info  
To view information on the EN-EL4 rechargeable  
Li-ion battery currently inserted in the camera,  
highlight Battery info in the setup menu (  
206) and press the multi selector to the right.  
SET UP  
Battery Info  
Battery meter  
95%  
Picture meter 40  
Calibration  
Not required  
Charging life  
NEW  
Replace  
Option  
Description  
Battery meter Current battery level expressed as a percentage (  
27).  
Number of times shutter has been released with current battery  
since battery was last charged. Note that camera may sometimes  
release shutter without recording photograph, for example when  
measuring value for preset white balance.  
Picture meter  
Required: due to repeated use and recharging, calibration is  
required to ensure that battery level can be measured accurately;  
recalibrate battery before charging (see MH-21 Quick Charger  
instructions for details).  
Calibration  
Not required: calibration not required.  
Five-level display showing battery age. 0 (New) indicates that bat-  
tery performance has not been affected; 4 (Replace) indicates that  
battery has reached end of charging life and should be replaced.  
Charging life  
216  
Wireless LAN  
This option is only available when the optional  
WT-1/WT-1A wireless transmitter is mounted on  
the camera. To adjust wireless LAN settings, high-  
light Wireless LAN in the setup menu ( 206)  
and press the multi selector to the right. Press the  
multi selector up or down to highlight an option  
and then press the multi selector to the right. See  
the WT-1/WT-1A User’s Manual for details.  
SET UP  
Wireless LAN  
Transceiver  
Status  
Auto send  
Send file as:  
Send folder  
Deselect all?  
Network settings  
OFF  
OFF  
+
RAW  
J
Transceiver  
Turn the WT-1/WT-1A transceiver on or off. Press  
the multi selector up or down to highlight an op-  
tion and then press the multi selector to the right.  
SET UP  
Wireless LAN  
Transceiver  
OFF Off  
OK  
Option  
Description  
ON On  
Off Transceiver off. Camera can not communi-  
(default) cate with server.  
Transceiver on. Camera can communicate  
with server.  
On  
Status  
Shows the current status of the link between  
the WT-1/WT-1A and the server. Press the multi  
selector to the right to return to the wireless LAN  
menu.  
SET UP  
Wireless LAN  
Status  
Connected  
Link quality  
Signal level  
Now sending  
Remaining  
Time left  
0 Frames  
0 S  
Option  
Description  
Status of server link.  
Status  
Link quality Five-level indicator of link quality.  
Signal level Five-level indicator of signal strength.  
Now sending Name of file currently being sent.  
Number of frames remaining to be  
Remaining  
sent.  
Estimated time needed to send re-  
maining data.  
Time left  
217  
Auto Send  
Choose whether to transmit photographs to the  
server as they are taken. Press the multi selector  
up or down to highlight an option and then press  
the multi selector to the right.  
SET UP  
Wireless LAN  
Auto send  
OFF Off  
OK  
ON On  
Option  
Description  
Photos not transmitted automatically after  
shooting. Photos can be selected for trans-  
mission in playback mode.  
Off  
(default)  
Photos transmitted to server automatically  
after recording. If transmission already in  
progress, photos will be sent in order taken.  
On  
Send File As  
When sending images taken at settings of NEF+  
JPEG Fine, NEF+JPEG Normal, or NEF+JPEG  
Basic, choose whether to send both NEF and  
JPEG files or only the JPEG files. Press the multi  
selector up or down to highlight an option and  
then press the multi selector to the right.  
SET UP  
Wireless LAN  
Send file as:  
+
NEF(Raw) JPEG OK  
JPEG only  
Option  
Description  
NEF(Raw)+JPEG  
Send both NEF and JPEG files.  
Send JPEG files only.  
(default)  
JPEG only  
Send Folder  
Entire folders can be selected for transmission to  
the server. Press the multi selector up or down  
to highlight the desired folder and then press the  
multi selector to the right to begin transmission of  
the selected folder and all files it contains.  
SET UP  
Wireless LAN  
100NCD2H  
OK  
USB  
When using the WT-1/WT-1A, set the USB option in the camera setup menu to PTP  
213).  
(
218  
Deselect All?  
Choose whether to remove “send” and “sent”  
marking from all images on the memory card.  
Press the multi selector up or down to highlight an  
option, then press the multi selector to the right.  
SET UP  
Wireless LAN  
Deselect all?  
No  
OK  
Yes  
Option  
Description  
No  
(default)  
“Send” and “sent” marking not removed.  
“Send” and “sent” marking removed from  
all files and folders.  
Yes  
Network Settings  
Adjust network settings for connection to the  
server. Press the multi selector up or down to  
highlight an option and then press the multi se-  
lector to the right.  
SET UP  
Wireless LAN  
Network settings  
Load settings file?  
Wireless  
TCP/IP  
FTP  
Option  
Description  
Load  
Load Wireless, TCP/IP, and FTP set-  
settings file? tings from camera memory card.  
Adjust settings for connection to wire-  
less network.  
Wireless  
Adjust TCP/IP settings, including IP ad-  
dress, DNS, and gateway settings.  
TCP/IP  
Enter password and user ID and adjust  
settings for connection to ftp server.  
FTP  
Firmware Version  
To display the current camera firmware version,  
SET UP  
Firmware Version  
highlight Firmware version in the setup menu  
(
206) and press the multi selector to the right.  
Version No. A 1.00  
B 1.00  
Press the multi selector to the left to return to the  
setup menu.  
219  
220  
Television Playback  
Connections  
222  
Connecting to External Devices  
Connecting to a  
Computer  
223–226  
Photographs and camera menus can be displayed  
on a television screen or recorded to video tape. If  
the supplied software is installed, the camera can  
be connected to a computer and photographs  
copied to disk for editing, viewing, printing, or  
long-term storage.  
Television Playback  
Read this section for information on connecting  
the camera to a television or VCR.  
Connecting to a Computer  
This section describes how to connect the camera  
to a computer.  
221  
Television Playback  
Connecting the Camera to a Video Device  
The supplied EG-D2 audio/video (AV) cable can be used to connect the D2H  
to a television or VCR for playback or recording.  
Turn the camera off.  
1
The EG-D2  
Turn the camera off before connecting or dis-  
connecting the EG-D2.  
Open the cover protecting the A/V-out and  
DC-in connectors.  
A/V out  
2
3
DC in  
Connect the EG-D2 as shown.  
Connect to  
video device  
Connect to  
camera  
Tune the television to the video channel.  
4
5
Turn the camera on. The camera will function normally; while the moni-  
tor is on, the image in the monitor will be shown on the television screen  
or recorded to video tape.  
Use an AC Adapter  
Use of an EH-6 AC adapter (available separately) is recommended for extended play-  
back. When the EH-6 is connected, the camera monitor-off delay will be fixed at ten  
minutes and the exposure meters will no longer turn off automatically.  
Video Output (  
209)  
Be sure that the video standard matches the standard used in the video device. Note  
that resolution will drop when images are output on a PAL device.  
Audio Output (  
212)  
Set Via VIDEO OUT to play back or record voice memos on the video device.  
222  
Connecting to a Computer  
Data Transfer and Camera Control  
The supplied UC-E4 USB cable can be used to connect the camera to a  
computer. Once the camera is connected, the supplied software can be  
used to copy photographs to the computer, where they can be browsed,  
viewed, and retouched. The camera can also be used with Nikon Capture 4  
(available separately), which supports batch processing and more advanced  
image editing options and can be used to control the camera directly from  
the computer.  
Before Connecting the Camera  
Install the necessary software after reading the manuals and reviewing the  
system requirements. To ensure that data transfer is not interrupted, be sure  
the camera battery is fully charged. If in doubt, charge the battery before use  
or use an EH-6 AC adapter (available separately).  
Before connecting the camera, set the USB option  
in the setup menu ( 206) according to the com-  
SET UP  
USB  
puter operating system and whether the camera  
Mass Storage  
PTP  
OK  
is being controlled from Nikon Capture 4 Camera  
Control or photographs are being transferred to  
the computer:  
Operating system  
Transfer  
Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control  
Windows XP Home Edition  
Windows XP Professional  
Mac OS X  
Choose PTP or  
Mass Storage  
Choose PTP  
Windows 2000 Professional  
Windows Millennium Edition (Me)  
Windows 98 Second Edition (SE)  
Mac OS 9  
Choose  
Mass Storage  
223  
Connecting the USB Cable  
Turn the computer on and wait for it to start up.  
1
2
Turn the camera off.  
Connect the UC-E4 USB cable as shown below. Connect the camera  
3
directly to the computer; do not connect the cable via a USB hub or key-  
board.  
IN  
A
/V  
O
U
T
DC  
IN  
Windows 2000 Professional, Windows Millennium Edition (Me),  
Windows 98 Second Edition (SE), Mac OS 9  
Do NOT select PTP when using Nikon Transfer under one of the above operating sys-  
tems. If the camera has been connected to a computer running one of the above  
operating systems with PTP selected, disconnect the camera as described below. Be  
sure to select Mass storage before reconnecting the camera.  
Windows 2000 Professional/Windows Me/Windows 98 SE  
The Windows hardware wizard will be displayed. Click Cancel to exit the wizard, and  
then disconnect the camera.  
Mac OS 9  
A dialog will be displayed stating that the computer is unable to use the driver needed  
for the “NIKON DSC D2H” USB device. Click Cancel to close the dialog, then discon-  
nect the camera.  
224  
Turn the camera on.  
4
If Mass Storage is selected for USB,  
will  
be displayed in the rear control panel and  
viewfinder. The aperture display in the top  
control panel will also show  
, and the PC  
mode indicator will flash (if PTP is selected,  
the camera displays will only change when  
Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control is run-  
ning). Photographs can be transferred to the  
computer as described in the documentation  
provided on the reference CD.  
If the Nikon Capture 4 Camera Control com-  
ponent is running, the top control panel will  
show  
in place of the number of exposures  
remaining. Any photographs taken will be re-  
corded to the computer hard disk rather than  
the camera memory card. See the Nikon Cap-  
ture 4 User’s Manual for more information.  
Do Not Turn the Camera Off  
Do not turn the camera off while transfer is in progress.  
225  
Disconnecting the Camera  
If PTP is selected for USB ( 213), the camera can be turned off and the  
USB cable disconnected once transfer is complete. If the USB option in the  
camera setup menu is still at its default setting of Mass storage, the camera  
must first be removed from the system as described below.  
Windows XP Home Edition/Windows XP Professional  
Click the “Safely Remove Hardware” icon ( ) in  
the taskbar and select Safely remove USB Mass  
Storage Device from the menu that appears.  
Windows 2000 Professional  
Click the “Unplug or Eject Hardware” icon ( ) in  
the taskbar and select Stop USB Mass Storage  
Device from the menu that appears.  
Windows Millennium Edition (Me)  
Click the “Unplug or Eject Hardware” icon ( ) in  
the taskbar and select Stop USB Disk from the  
menu that appears.  
Windows 98 Second Edition (SE)  
In My Computer, click with the right mouse but-  
ton on the removable disk corresponding to the  
camera and select Eject from the menu that ap-  
pears.  
Macintosh  
Drag the camera volume (“NIKON_D2H” or  
“NIKON D2H”) into the Trash.  
Mac OS X  
Mac OS 9  
226  
Technical  
Notes  
Camera Care, Options, and Resources  
This chapter covers the following topics:  
Optional Accessories  
A list of the lenses and other accessories available  
for the D2H.  
Caring for the Camera  
Information on storage and maintenance.  
Troubleshooting  
A list of the error messages displayed by your cam-  
era and how to deal with them.  
Specifications  
Principal specifications for the D2H.  
227  
Optional Accessories  
Lenses and Other Accessories  
Lenses for the D2H  
The D2H is compatible with a variety of AF Nikkor lenses for 35-mm film  
cameras, including wide-angle, telephoto, zoom, micro, defocus image con-  
trol (DC), and regular lenses with focal lengths of 14–600mm ( 230). Note  
that IX Nikkor CPU lenses can not be used with the D2H.  
The lenses that can be used with the D2H are listed below.  
Camera setting  
Focus  
mode  
Exposure  
mode  
Metering  
system  
M (with  
electronic  
range finder)  
S
C
P
S
A
M
M
1
Lens/accessory  
Type G or D AF Nikkor3  
3D Color  
AF-S, AF-I Nikkor  
PC-Micro Nikkor 85mm f/2.8D4  
AF-S/AF-I Teleconverter7  
5
6
8
8
Other AF Nikkor (except lenses  
for F3AF)  
9
9
10  
AI-P Nikkor  
AI-,AI-S, or Series E Nikkor12  
AI modified Nikkor  
10  
13  
14  
15  
16  
13  
17  
13  
13  
Medical Nikkor 120mm f/4  
Reflex Nikkor  
15  
15  
15  
15  
5
14  
PC-Nikkor  
AI-type Teleconverter 18  
8
14  
14  
8
8
TC-16A AF Teleconverter  
PB-6 Bellows Focusing Attach-  
ment19  
8
20  
13  
14  
14  
Auto extension rings (PK-series  
11A, 12, or 13; PN-11)  
8
1 Spot metering meters selected focus area.  
2 IX-Nikkor lenses can not be used.  
3 Vibration Reduction (VR) supported with VR lenses.  
4 The camera’s exposure metering and flash control systems do not  
work properly when shifting and/or tilting the lens, or when an  
aperture other than the maximum aperture is used.  
6 Manual exposure mode only.  
7 Compatible with AF-I Nikkor lenses and with all AF-S lenses except  
DX 12–24mm f/4G ED, 17–35mm f/2.8D ED, DX 17–55mm f/2.8G  
ED, 24–85mm f/3.5–4.5G ED, VR 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G ED, and  
28–70mm f/2.8D ED.  
8 With maximum effective aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
9 When focusing at minimum focus distance with AF 80–200mm  
5 Electronic range finder can not be used with shifting or tilting.  
228  
f/2.8S, AF 35–70mm f/2.8S, new AF 28–85mm f/3.5–4.5S, or AF  
28–85mm f/3.5–4.5S lens at maximum zoom, in-focus indicator  
may be displayed when image on matte screen in viewfinder is  
not in focus. Adjust focus manually until image in viewfinder is in  
focus.  
16 Can be used at in manual exposure modes at shutter speeds slower  
than 1/125s. If maximum aperture is specified using Non-CPU  
lens data option in shooting menu, aperture value will be displayed  
in viewfinder and top control panel.  
17 Exposure determined by presetting lens aperture. In aperture-prior-  
ity auto exposure mode, preset aperture using lens aperture ring be-  
fore performing AE lock or shifting lens. In manual exposure mode,  
preset aperture using lens aperture ring and determine exposure  
before shifting lens.  
18 Exposure compensation required when used with AI 28–85mm  
f/3.5–4.5S, AI 28–105mm f/3.5–4.5S, or AF-S 80–200mm f/2.8D.  
See teleconverter manual for details.  
19 Requires PK-12 or PK-13 auto extension ring. PB-6D may be  
required depending on camera orientation.  
10 With maximum aperture of f/5.6 or faster.  
11 Some lenses can not be used (see below).  
12 Range of rotation for Ai 80–200mm f/2.8S ED tripod mount limited  
by camera body. Filters can not be exchanged whileAi 200–400mm  
f/4S ED is mounted on camera.  
13 If maximum aperture is specified using Non-CPU lens data option  
in shooting menu, aperture value will be displayed in viewfinder and  
top control panel.  
14 Can be used only if lens focal length and maximum aperture are  
specified using Non-CPU lens data option in shooting menu. Use  
spot or center-weighted metering if desired results are not achieved.  
15 For improved precision, specify lens focal length and maximum  
aperture using Non-CPU lens data option in shooting menu.  
20 Use preset aperture. In manual exposure mode, preset aperture  
using focusing attachment before determining exposure and taking  
photograph.  
PF-4 Reprocopy Outfit requires PA-4 Camera Holder.  
Incompatible Accessories and Non-CPU Lenses  
The following accessories and non-CPU lenses can NOT be used with the D2H:  
• Non-AI lenses  
• Lenses for the F3AF (80mm f/2.8,  
• Lenses that require the AU-1 focus- 200mm f/3.5, TC-16 Teleconverter)  
ing unit (400mm f/4.5, 600mm f/5.6, • PC 28mm f/4 (serial number 180900 or  
800mm f/8, 1200mm f/11)  
• Fisheye (6mm f/5.6, 8mm f/8, OP 10mm • PC 35mm f/2.8 (serial numbers 851001–  
earlier)  
f/5.6)  
906200)  
• 21mm f/4 (old type)  
• K2 rings  
• PC 35mm f/3.5 (old type)  
• 1000mm f/6.3 Reflex (old type)  
• ED 180–600mm f/8 (serial numbers • 1000mm f/11 Reflex (serial numbers  
174041–174180) 142361–143000)  
• ED 360–1200mm f/11 (serial numbers • 2000mm f/11 Reflex (serial numbers  
174031–174127)  
200111–200310)  
• 200–600mm f/9.5 (serial numbers  
280001–300490)  
Compatible Non-CPU Lenses  
If lens data are specified using the Non-CPU lens data option in the shooting menu,  
many of the features available with CPU lenses can also be used with non-CPU lenses.  
If lens data are not specified, color matrix metering can not be used, and center-  
weighted metering is used when matrix metering is selected.  
Non-CPU lenses can only be used in exposure modes A and M, when aperture must be  
set using the lens aperture ring. If the maximum aperture has not been specified using  
Non-CPU lens data, the camera aperture display will show the number of stops from  
maximum aperture; the actual aperture value must be read off the lens aperture ring.  
Aperture-priority auto will be selected automatically in exposure modes P and S. The  
exposure-mode indicator in the top control panel will blink, and A will be displayed in  
the viewfinder.  
229  
CPU lenses can be identified by the presence of CPU contacts. Type G lenses  
are marked with a “G” on the lens barrel, type D lenses with a “D.”  
CPU lens  
Type G lens  
Type D lens  
Type G lenses are not equipped with a lens aperture ring. Unlike other CPU  
lenses, there is no need to lock the aperture ring at the minimum aperture  
setting (maximum f/-number) when using a type G lens.  
Picture Angle and Focal Length  
A 35-mm camera has a diagonal picture angle approximately one-and-a-  
half times that of the D2H. When calculating the focal length of the lenses  
for the D2H in 35-mm format, you will therefore need to multiply the focal  
length of the lens by 1.5, as shown in the following table:  
Approximate focal length (mm) in 35-mm format  
Picture angle  
35-mm film camera  
D2H  
(modified for picture angle)  
17  
20  
30  
24  
36  
28  
42  
35  
50  
75  
60  
90  
85  
25.5  
52.5  
127.5  
35-mm film camera 105  
D2H  
135  
180  
200  
300  
300  
450  
400  
600  
500  
750  
600  
900  
157.5 202.5 270  
Calculating Picture Angle  
Picture size (35-mm format)  
The size of the area exposed by a 35-mm  
camera is 36×24mm. The size of the  
area exposed by the D2H, in contrast,  
is 23.3×15.5mm. As a result, the picture  
angle of photographs taken with the D2H  
differs from the picture angle for 35-mm  
cameras, even when the focal length of  
the lens and the distance to the subject  
are the same.  
(36 mm × 24 mm)  
Picture diagonal  
Lens  
Picture size (D2H)  
(23.3 mm × 15.5 mm)  
Picture angle (35-mm format)  
Picture angle (D2H)  
230  
Other Accessories  
At the time of writing, the following accessories were available for the D2H.  
Contact your retailer or local Nikon representative for details.  
Batteries/  
Chargers/  
EN-EL4 Rechargeable Li-ion Battery  
Additional EN-EL4 batteries are available from local retailers and  
AC adapters  
Nikon service representatives.  
MH-21 Quick Charger  
The MH-21 can be used to recharge and calibrate EN-EL4 batter-  
ies. It can fully recharge an exhausted EN-EL4 battery in about 100  
minutes.  
EH-6 AC Adapter  
The EH-6 can be used with AC power sources of 50–60Hz and  
100–120V or 200–240V. Separate power cables are available for  
use in North America, the United Kingdom, continental Europe,  
Australia, and Japan.  
Wireless  
LAN  
adapters  
and  
WT-1/WT-1A Wireless Transmitter  
The WT-1/WT-1A mounts on the bottom of the camera and connects  
via a USB cable to the cameras USB connector. When connected,  
photographs can be uploaded to an ftp server via a wireless net-  
work. Power is supplied from the camera. Wireless network with ftp  
server required. For more information, see “Menu Guide: The Setup  
antennas  
Menu” (  
206).  
WA-E1 Extended Range Antenna  
Extends line-of-sight range of WT-1/WT-1A to a maximum of about  
150m (outdoors, 1Mbps)  
Use Only Nikon Brand Electronic Accessories  
Your Nikon D2H digital camera is designed to the highest standards and includes  
complex electronic circuitry. Only Nikon brand electronic accessories (including battery  
chargers, batteries, and AC adapters) certified by Nikon specifically for use with your  
Nikon digital camera are engineered and proven to operate within the operational and  
safety requirements of this electronic circuitry.  
THE USE OF NON-NIKON ELECTRONIC ACCESSORIES COULD DAMAGE YOUR CAMERA AND MAY VOID YOUR  
NIKON WARRANTY. The use of third-party rechargeable Li-ion batteries not approved by  
Nikon could interfere with normal operation of the camera or result in the batteries  
overheating, igniting, rupturing, or leaking.  
For more information about Nikon brand accessories, contact your local authorized  
Nikon dealer.  
231  
Viewfinder  
eyepiece  
Focusing Screens  
The following focusing screens are available for the D2H:  
accessories  
A type B BriteView focusing screen is  
included with the camera.  
Type B  
The type  
E
clear-matte focusing  
screen is etched with a grid, making  
it suitable for copying and architec-  
tural photography. Best results are  
achieved with PC-Nikkor lenses.  
Type E  
DG-2 Magnifier  
The DG-2 magnifies the scene displayed in the viewfinder. Use for  
close-up photography, copying, telephoto lenses, and other tasks  
that call for added precision. DK-7 eyepiece adapter (available sepa-  
rately) required.  
DK-14 and DK-17A Antifog Finder Eyepieces  
These viewfinder eyepieces prevent fogging in humid or cold condi-  
tions. The DK-17A is equipped with a safety lock.  
DK-2 Rubber Eyepiece Cup  
The DK-2 makes the image in the viewfinder easier to see, preventing  
eye fatigue.  
Diopter-Adjustment Viewfinder Lenses  
To accommodate individual differences in vision, viewfinder lenses  
are available with diopters of –3, –2, 0, +1, and +2m–1. The DK-17C  
is equipped with a safety lock.  
DR-4 Right-Angle Viewing Attachment  
The DR-4 attaches at a right angle to the viewfinder eyepiece, allow-  
ing the image in the viewfinder to be viewed from above when the  
camera is in the horizontal shooting position.  
DK-7 Eyepiece Adapter  
The DK-7 is used when attaching the DG-2 Magnifier or DR-3 Right-  
Angle Viewing Attachment to the D2H.  
232  
Filters  
Nikon filters can be divided into three types: screw-in, drop-in, and rear-  
interchange. Use Nikon filters; filters manufactured by other makers  
may interfere with autofocus or electronic range finding.  
• The D2H can not be used with linear polarizing filters. Use the C-PL  
circular polarizing filter instead.  
• The NC and L37C filters are recommended for protecting the lens.  
When using an R60 filter, set exposure compensation to +1.  
To prevent moiré, use of a filter is not recommended when the sub-  
ject is framed against a bright light, or when a bright light source is  
in the frame.  
• Color matrix and 3D color matrix metering may not produce the de-  
sired results when used with filters with an exposure factor (filter fac-  
tor) over 1× (Y44, Y48, Y52, O56, R60, X0, X1, C-PL, ND2S, ND4S,  
ND4, ND8S, ND8, ND400, A2, A12, B2, B8, B12). We recommend  
center-weighted metering. For details, see the manual provided with  
the filter.  
Optional  
SB-800 Speedlight  
Speedlights  
This high performance Speedlight has a Guide Number of 53/174 (m/  
ft, 35-mm zoom head position, ISO 200, 20°C/68°F; GN at ISO 100  
is 38/125) and supports i-TTL, TTL, auto aperture (AA), non-TTL auto  
(A), manual, and repeating flash control. Flash sync mode, including  
slow and rear-curtain sync, can be set from the camera. When used  
with the D2H, the SB-800 supports Auto FP High-Speed Sync for  
sync speeds faster than ½50 s (repeating flash mode excluded), Flash  
Color Information Communication for natural color balance, FV Lock  
for recomposing photos without changing flash level, and Advanced  
Wireless Lighting with support for i-TTL, auto aperture, manual, and  
repeating flash control. The built-in AF-assist illuminator can be used  
with all of the D2Hs eleven focus areas. For bounce-flash or close-up  
photography, the flash head can be rotated through 90° above and  
below the horizontal, 180° left, and 90° right, while soft lighting  
can be achieved with the supplied SW-10H bounce adapter. Auto  
power zoom (24–105mm) ensures that the illuminating is adjusted in  
accord with lens focal length. The built-in wide panel can be used for  
illuminating angles of 14mm and 17mm. An illuminator is included  
to assist in adjusting settings in the dark. The SB-800 accepts four  
AA batteries (five AA batteries when powered by the supplied SD-  
800 battery pack) or SD-6, SD-7, or SD-8A power sources (available  
separately). Custom settings are available for fine-tuning all aspects  
of flash operation.  
233  
Optional  
Speedlights  
(continued)  
SB-80DX Speedlight  
This high performance Speedlight has a Guide Number of 53/174  
(m/ft, 35-mm zoom head position, ISO 200, 20°C/68°F; GN at ISO  
100 is 38/125) and accepts four LR6 (AA) alkaline batteries or SD-7,  
SD-8A, and SK-6 power sources (available separately)  
.
For bounce-  
flash or close-up photography, the flash head can be rotated through  
90° above and 7° below the horizontal, 180° left, and 90° right; a  
wide panel or bounce adapter can be used for a wider flash angle,  
producing soft lighting that balances the foreground subject with the  
background. An illuminator is included to assist in adjusting settings  
in the dark. Custom settings can be used to fine-tune all aspects of  
operation.  
SB-50DX Speedlight  
This Guide Number 32/105 Speedlight (m/ft, manual mode, 35-mm  
zoom-head position, ISO 200, 20°C/68°F; GN at ISO 100 is 22/72) is  
powered by two CR123A (DL123A) 3V lithium batteries. In addition  
to auto power zoom, it has a tilt position of +90° to –18°, allowing  
it to be used both for bounce-flash photography and at ranges as  
close as 30cm (1´).  
PC card  
EC-AD1 PC Card Adapter  
adapters  
The EC-AD1 PC card adapter allows Type I CompactFlash memory  
cards to be inserted in PCMCIA card slots.  
Software  
Nikon Capture 4  
Nikon Capture 4 can be used to capture photos to a computer and to  
edit and save RAW images in other formats.  
234  
Remote  
The D2H is equipped with a ten-pin remote  
terminal terminal for remote control and automatic  
accessories photography. The terminal is provided with  
a cap, which protects the contacts when the  
terminal is not in use. The following acces-  
sories can be used:  
Accessory  
Description  
Length*  
Remote shutter release; can be used to reduce camera  
shake. Equipped with time-exposure and timer features,  
emitting a beep once a second while the shutter is open.  
MC-20  
Remote Cord  
80cm  
(2´7˝)  
MC-21  
Extension Cord  
3m  
(9´10˝)  
Can be connected to MC-series 20, 22, 25, or 30.  
Remote shutter release with blue, yellow, and black termi-  
nals for connection to a remote shutter-triggering device,  
allowing control via sound or electronic signals.  
MC-22  
Remote Cord  
1m  
(3´3˝)  
MC-23  
Connecting  
Cord  
40cm  
(1´4˝)  
Connects two D2H cameras for simultaneous operation.  
Ten-pin to two-pin adapter cord for connection to devices  
with two-pin terminals, including the MW-2 radio control  
set, MT-2 intervalometer, and ML-2 modulite control set.  
MC-25  
Adapter Cord  
20cm  
(8˝)  
MC-30  
Remote shutter release; can be used to reduce camera 80cm  
Remote Cord shake or keep the shutter open during a time exposure.  
(2´7˝)  
ML-2 Modulite Allows infrared remote control at ranges of up to 100m  
Remote  
(328´). Use multiple units for remote control over greater  
Control Set distances. Requires MC-25 adapter cord.  
ML-3 Modulite  
Remote  
Control Set  
Allows infrared remote control at ranges of up to 8m  
(26´).  
*
All figures are approximate.  
235  
Approved Memory Cards  
The following cards have been tested and approved for use in the D2H:  
16MB, 32MB, 48MB, 80MB, 128MB, 160MB,  
SDCFB  
192MB, 256MB, 384MB, 512MB, 1GB  
SDCFB (Type II)  
SDCF2B (Type II)  
SDCFH  
300MB  
256MB  
SanDisk  
128MB, 192MB, 256MB, 384MB, 512MB  
4× USB  
8× USB  
16MB, 32MB, 48MB, 64MB  
10× USB  
160MB  
12× USB  
64MB, 128MB, 192MB  
16× USB  
24× USB  
24× WA USB  
32× WA USB  
40× WA USB  
Lexar Media  
192MB, 256MB, 320MB, 512MB, 640MB, 1GB  
256MB, 512MB  
1GB  
256MB, 512MB, 2GB, 4GB  
Renesas  
Technology  
(Hitachi)  
Compact FLASH  
HB28 C8×  
16MB, 32MB  
Microdrive  
DSCM  
10340 (340MB),10512 (512MB), 11000 (1GB)  
Operation is not guaranteed with other makes of card. For more details on  
the above cards, please contact the manufacturer.  
Memory Cards  
• Memory cards may be hot after use. Observe due caution when removing memory  
cards from the camera.  
• Format memory cards before first use.  
Turn the power off before inserting or removing memory cards. Do not remove  
memory cards from the camera, turn the camera off, or remove or disconnect the  
power source during formatting or while data are being recorded, deleted, or copied  
to a computer. Failure to observe these precautions could result in loss of data or in  
damage to the camera or card.  
• Do not touch the card terminals with your fingers or metal objects.  
• Do not apply force to the card casing. Failure to observe this precaution could dam-  
age the card.  
• Do not bend, drop, or subject to strong physical shocks.  
• Do not expose to water, high levels of humidity, or direct sunlight.  
The Control Panel  
Rarely, static electricity may cause the control panel to brighten or darken. This does  
not indicate a malfunction; the display will shortly return to normal.  
236  
Caring for the Camera  
Storage and Maintenance  
Storage  
When the camera will not be used for an extended period, replace the mon-  
itor cover, remove the battery, and store the battery in a cool, dry area with  
the terminal cover in place. To prevent mold or mildew, store the camera in a  
dry, well-ventilated area. For long-term storage, place the camera in a plastic  
bag containing a desiccant (note that desiccant gradually loses its capacity to  
absorb moisture and should be replaced at regular intervals). Do not store  
your camera with naphtha or camphor moth balls or in locations that:  
• are poorly ventilated or damp  
• are next to equipment that produces strong electromagnetic fields, such as  
televisions or radios  
• are exposed to temperatures above 50°C/122°F (for example, near a  
space heater or in a closed vehicle on a hot day) or below –10°C (14°F)  
• are subject to humidities of over 60%  
To prevent mold or mildew, take the camera out of storage at least once a  
month. Turn the camera on and release the shutter a few times before put-  
ting the camera away again.  
Cleaning  
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft,  
dry cloth. After using the camera at the beach or seaside, wipe off  
sand or salt with a cloth lightly dampened in distilled water and dry  
thoroughly.  
Camera  
body  
These elements are made of glass and are easily damaged. Remove  
dust and lint with a blower. If using an aerosol blower, keep the can  
vertical to prevent the discharge of liquid. To remove fingerprints and  
other stains, apply a small amount of lens cleaner to a soft cloth and  
clean with care.  
Lens,  
mirror, and  
viewfinder  
Remove dust and lint with a blower. When removing fingerprints and  
other stains, wipe the surface lightly with a soft cloth or chamois leather.  
Do not apply pressure, as this could result in damage or malfunction.  
Monitor  
Use a blower to remove dust and lint, then wipe gently with a soft, dry  
cloth. Do not use alcohol or lens cleaning solutions.  
Ambient  
light sensor  
The Monitor  
Should the monitor break, care should be taken to avoid injury caused by broken glass  
and to prevent liquid crystal from entering your eyes and mouth.  
237  
Replacing the Focusing Screen  
The D2H is supplied with type B BriteView focusing screen. An optional type  
E clear-matte Fresnel screen is available for tracing and architectural photog-  
raphy ( 232). To change focusing screens:  
Turn the camera off and remove the lens.  
1
Using the tweezers supplied with the focusing  
2
3
4
5
screen, pull the focusing screen latch towards  
you. The screen holder will spring open.  
Remove the existing screen, using the sup-  
plied tweezers and being careful to handle the  
screen by the tab to avoid scratches.  
Using the tweezers and handling the screen  
by the tab, set the replacement screen in the  
holder.  
Push the front edge of holder upward until it  
clicks into place.  
Replacing Focusing Screens  
Do not touch the surface of the mirror or focusing screens.  
Focusing Screens  
Use only screens designated for use in the D2H.  
238  
Replacing the Clock Battery  
The camera clock is powered by a CR1616 lithium battery with a life of about  
four years. When the clock battery is exhausted, a  
icon will be dis-  
played in the top control panel while the exposure meters are on. When a  
icon blinks in the top control panel while the exposure meters are on,  
Photographs can still be taken but will not be stamped with the correct time  
and date, and interval timer photography will not function correctly. Replace  
the battery as described below.  
The clock battery chamber is located on the roof of the main battery  
chamber. Turn the camera off and remove the EN-EL4 battery.  
1
2
3
4
5
6
Slide the clock battery chamber cover toward  
the front of the main battery chamber.  
CR 1616  
3V  
Remove the clock battery.  
D
C
I
N
Insert new CR1616 lithium battery so that the  
positive side (the side marked with “+” and  
the battery name) is visible.  
CR 1616  
3V  
D
C
I
N
Slide the clock battery chamber cover towards  
the back of the main battery chamber until it  
clicks into place.  
CR 1616  
3V  
D
C
I
N
Reinsert the EN-EL4.  
CAUTION  
Use only CR1616 lithium batteries. Using another type of battery could cause an ex-  
plosion. Dispose of used batteries as directed.  
Inserting the Clock Battery  
Insert the clock battery in the correct orientation. Inserting the battery incorrectly  
could not only prevent the clock from functioning but could damage the camera.  
Setting the Time and Date  
Be sure to set the time and date after replacing the clock battery (  
19).  
239  
The Low-Pass Filter  
The LBCAST image sensor that acts as the cameras picture element is fitted  
with a low-pass filter to prevent moiré. Although this filter prevents foreign  
objects from adhering directly to the image sensor, under certain conditions  
dirt or dust on the filter may appear in photographs. If you suspect that dirt  
or dust inside the camera is affecting your photographs, you can check for  
the presence of foreign objects on the low-pass filter as described below.  
Turn the camera off and connect an EH-6 AC adapter (available sepa-  
1
rately). If you do not have access to an EH-6 AC adapter, take the cam-  
era to a Nikon-authorized service center.  
Remove the lens and turn the camera on.  
2
3
Press the  
button and select Mirror lock-  
SET UP  
Mirror lock-up  
up from the setup menu ( 208). Highlight  
Image sensor cleaning and press the multi  
selector to the right. The message, “Press  
shutter-release button” will be displayed in  
the camera monitor, and a row of dashes will  
be displayed in the control panel and view-  
finder.  
OFF OFF  
OK  
ON Image sensor cleaning  
Press the shutter-release button all the way  
down. The mirror will be raised and the shut-  
ter curtain will open, revealing the low-pass  
filter, and the row of dashes in the control  
panel will blink.  
4
5
Holding the camera so that light falls on the  
low-pass filter, examine the filter for dust or  
lint. If there are foreign objects on the filter,  
the filter requires cleaning. See the following  
section.  
240  
Turn the camera off. The mirror will return to the down position and the  
shutter curtain will close. Replace the lens or body cap and disconnect  
the AC adapter.  
6
Cleaning the Low-Pass Filter  
The low-pass filter is extremely delicate and easily damaged. Nikon recom-  
mends that filter be cleaned only by Nikon-authorized service personnel.  
Should you choose to clean the filter yourself, follow the steps below.  
Raise the mirror as described in steps 1–4 on the preceding page.  
1
2
Remove dust and lint from the filter with a  
blower. Do not use a blower-brush, as the  
bristles could damage the filter. Dirt that can  
not be removed with a blower can only be re-  
moved by Nikon-authorized service personnel.  
Under no circumstances should you touch or  
wipe the filter.  
Turn the camera off. The mirror will return to the down position and the  
shutter curtain will close. Replace the lens or body cap and disconnect  
the AC adapter.  
3
Servicing the Camera and Accessories  
The D2H is a precision device and requires regular servicing. Nikon recommends that  
the camera be inspected by the original retailer or Nikon service representative once  
every one to two years, and that it be serviced once every three to five years (note that  
fees apply to these services). Frequent inspection and servicing are particularly recom-  
mended if the camera is used professionally. Any accessories regularly used with the  
camera, such as lenses or optional Speedlights, should be included when the camera  
is inspected or serviced.  
241  
Troubleshooting  
Understanding Error Messages and Displays  
This section lists the indicators and error messages that appear in the view-  
finder, control panel, and monitor when there is a problem with the camera.  
Consult the list below before contacting your retailer or Nikon representa-  
tive.  
Indicator  
Control View-  
panel finder  
Problem  
Solution  
Lens aperture ring is not set to Set ring to minimum aperture  
20  
27  
27  
27  
(blinks)  
minimum aperture.  
Low battery.  
(largest f/-number).  
Ready a fully-charged spare  
battery.  
Battery exhausted.  
Replace battery.  
(blinks) (blinks)  
(blinks) (blinks)  
Contact Nikon-authorized ser-  
vice representative.  
Battery can not be used.  
No lens attached, or non-  
CPU lens attached without  
specifying maximum aperture.  
Aperture shown in stops from  
maximum aperture.  
Aperture value will be dis-  
played if maximum aperture 124  
is specified.  
Camera unable to focus using  
(blinks) autofocus.  
Focus manually.  
32  
48  
33  
• Choose a lower sensitivity  
(ISO equivalency)  
• Use optional ND filter  
• In exposure mode:  
S Increase shutter speed  
A Choose a smaller aperture  
(larger f/-number)  
Subject too bright; photo will  
be overexposed.  
88  
90  
• Choose a higher sensitivity  
(ISO equivalency)  
48  
• Use optional Speedlight  
• In exposure mode:  
S Lower shutter speed  
A Choose a larger aperture  
(smaller f/-number)  
106  
Subject too dark; photo will be  
underexposed.  
88  
90  
242  
Indicator  
Control View-  
panel finder  
Problem  
Solution  
selected in shutter-pri- Change shutter speed or se-  
88,  
92  
(blinks)  
(blinks)  
ority auto.  
lect manual exposure mode.  
Speedlight that does not  
support D-TTL flash control  
attached and set to TTL.  
Change flash mode setting on 111,  
optional Speedlight. 112  
Speedlight that does not  
support red-eye reduction at-  
tached and flash sync mode  
set to red-eye reduction.  
Change flash sync mode or 111,  
use Speedlight that supports 112,  
(blinks)  
red-eye reduction.  
113  
If indicator blinks for 3s after Check photo in monitor; if  
flash fires, photo may be un- underexposed, adjust settings  
117  
(blinks)  
(blinks)  
derexposed.  
and try again.  
Release shutter. If error per-  
sists or appears frequently,  
consult with Nikon-authorized  
service representative.  
Camera malfunction.  
2
Memory insufficient to record  
further photos at current set-  
tings, or camera has run out of  
file or folder numbers.  
• Reduce quality or size.  
• Delete photographs.  
• Insert new memory card.  
41  
148  
22  
(blinks)  
(blinks)  
Indicator  
Control  
panel  
Monitor  
Problem  
Solution  
Turn camera off and con-  
firm that card is correctly  
inserted.  
NO CARD  
PRESENT  
Camera cannot detect  
memory card.  
22  
CARD IS NOT  
FORMATTED  
Memory card has not been  
formatted for use in D2H.  
23,  
207  
Format memory card.  
243  
Indicator  
Control  
Monitor  
panel  
Problem  
Solution  
• Error accessing memory • Use Nikon-approved card. 236  
card.  
• Check that contacts are iv,  
clean. If card is damaged, 237  
contact retailer or Nikon  
representative.  
THIS CARD  
CANNOT BE  
USED  
(blinks)  
• Unable to create new • Delete files or insert new 22,  
folder.  
memory card.  
148  
23,  
• Card has not been for- • Format memory card.  
matted for use in D2H.  
207  
No images on memory Select folder containing im-  
card or folder(s) selected ages from Playback folder  
for playback contain no menu or insert different  
FOLDER  
CONTAINS  
NO IMAGES  
22,  
150  
images.  
memory card.  
No images can be played  
back until another folder  
has been selected or Hide  
image used to allow at  
least one image to be dis-  
played.  
ALL IMAGES  
HIDDEN  
All photos in current folder  
are hidden.  
150,  
154  
FILE DOES  
NOT  
CONTAIN  
IMAGE DATA  
File has been created or  
modified using a computer  
or different make of cam-  
era, or file is corrupt.  
23,  
148,  
207  
Delete file or reformat  
memory card.  
A Note on Electronically-Controlled Cameras  
In extremely rare instances, unusual characters may appear in the control panel and  
the camera may stop functioning. In most cases, this phenomenon is caused by a  
strong external static charge. Turn the camera off, remove and replace the battery,  
and turn the camera on again, or, if you are using an AC adapter (available separately),  
disconnect and reconnect the adapter and turn the camera on again. In the event  
of continued malfunction, contact your retailer or Nikon representative. Note that  
disconnecting the power source as described above may result in loss of any data not  
recorded to the memory card at the time the problem occurred. Data already recorded  
to the card will not be affected.  
244  
Specifications  
Type  
Single-lens reflex digital camera with interchangeable lenses  
4.1 million  
Effective pixels  
LBCAST image sensor 23.3×15.5 mm; total pixels: 4.26 million  
Image size (pixels)  
2464×1632 (large), 1840×1224 (medium)  
Lens mount  
Nikon F mount (with AF coupling and AF contacts)  
Compatible lenses*  
Type G or D AF Nikkor All functions supported  
Micro Nikkor 85mm  
F2.8D  
All functions supported except autofocus and some exposure  
modes  
Other AF Nikkor†  
All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering and  
3D multi-sensor balanced fill-flash for digital SLR  
All functions supported except 3D color matrix metering, 3D  
multi-sensor balanced fill-flash for digital SLR, and autofocus  
Can be used in exposure modes A and M; electronic range  
finder can be used if maximum aperture is f/5.6 or faster;  
color matrix metering, multi-sensor balanced fill-flash for  
digital SLR, and aperture value display supported if user  
provides lens data  
AI-P Nikkor  
Non-CPU  
*
IX Nikkor lenses can not be used  
Excluding lenses for F3AF  
Picture angle  
Equivalent in 35-mm format is approximately 1.5 times lens  
focal length  
Viewfinder  
Diopter adjustment  
Eyepoint  
Optical fixed pentaprism  
3+1m–1  
19.9mm (–1.0m–1)  
Focusing screen  
Frame coverage  
Magnification  
Type B BriteView clear matte screen Mark II provided  
Approximately 100% of lens (vertical and horizontal)  
Approximately 0.86× (50-mm lens at infinity; –1.0m–1)  
Reflex mirror  
Quick return  
Lens aperture  
Focus-area selection  
Lens servo  
Instant return with depth-of-field preview  
Single area or group can be selected from 11 focus areas  
Instant single-servo AF (S); continuous-servo AF (C); manual  
(M); predictive focus tracking automatically activated accord-  
ing to subject status in single- and continuous-servo AF  
245  
Autofocus  
TTL phase detection by Nikon Multi-CAM2000 autofocus  
module  
Detection range  
AF-area mode  
1+19EV (ISO 100 at 20°C/68°F)  
Single-area AF, dynamic-area AF, group dynamic-AF, dy-  
namic-area AF with closest subject priority  
Focus can be locked by pressing shutter-release button half-  
way (single-servo AF) or by pressing AE-L/AF-L button  
Focus lock  
Exposure  
Metering  
Matrix  
Three-mode through-the-lens (TTL) exposure metering  
3D color matrix metering supported with type G and D  
lenses; color matrix metering available with other CPU lenses  
and with non-CPU lenses if user provides lens data  
Weight of 75% given to 6, 8, 10, or 13-mm circle in center of  
frame, or weighting based on average of entire frame  
Meters 3-mm circle (about 2% of frame) centered on se-  
lected focus area  
Center-weighted  
Spot  
Range  
(ISO 100 equivalent,  
f/1.4 lens, 20°C/68°F)  
0–20EV (3D color matrix or center-weighted metering)  
2–20EV (spot metering)  
Exposure meter coupling Combined CPU and AI  
Exposure control  
Exposure modes  
Programmed auto with flexible program; shutter-priority  
auto; aperture priority auto; manual  
Exposure compensation 5+5EV in increments of 1/3, ½, or 1EV  
Bracketing  
Exposure and/or flash bracketing (2–9 exposures in incre-  
ments of 1/3, ½, 2/3, or 1EV)  
Exposure lock  
Luminosity locked at detected value with AE-L/AF-L button  
Shutter  
Speed  
Electronically-controlled vertical-travel focal-plane shutter  
301/8000 s in steps of 1/3, ½, or 1EV, bulb  
1
Sensitivity  
2001600 (in steps of /3, ½, or 1EV), 3200, 6400 (ISO  
equivalent); auto gain to ISO 1600 equivalent  
White balance  
Bracketing  
Auto (TTL white-balance with 1,005 pixels RGB sensor), six  
manual modes with fine-tuning, color temperature setting  
2–9 exposures in increments of 1, 2, or 3  
246  
Flash  
Sync contact  
Flash control  
TTL  
X-contact only; flash synchronization at up to ½50 s  
TTL flash control by combined five-segment TTL multi sensor  
with single-component IC and 1,005-pixel AE sensor  
SB-800: i-TTL balanced fill-flash for digital SLR and standard  
i-TTL flash for digital SLR  
SB-80DX, 28DX, or 50DX with type G or D lens: 3D multi-  
sensor balanced-fill flash for digital SLR  
SB-80DX, 28DX, or 50DX with other lens: multi-sensor bal-  
anced-fill flash for digital SLR  
SB-80DX, 28DX, or 50DX with spot metering: standard TTL  
flash for digital SLR  
Auto aperture  
Non-TTL auto  
Available with SB-800, 80DX, 28DX, or 50DX and CPU lens  
Available with such Speedlights as SB-800, 28, 27, and 22s  
Range-priority manual Available with SB-800  
Sync modes Front curtain sync (normal), slow sync, rear-curtain sync, red-  
eye reduction, red-eye reduction with slow sync  
Flash-ready indicator Lights when SB-series Speedlight such as 800, 80DX, 28DX,  
50DX, 28, 27, or 22s is fully charged; blinks for 3s after flash  
is fired at full output  
Accessory shoe  
Creative Lighting  
System  
Standard ISO hot-shoe contact with safety lock  
With SB-800, supports Advanced Wireless Lighting, Auto FP  
High-Speed Sync, Flash Color Information Communication,  
modeling illumination, and FV Lock  
Storage  
Media  
File system  
Type I and II CompactFlash memory cards; Microdrives  
Compliant with Design Rule for Camera File System (DCF)  
and Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)  
Compression  
Compressed NEF (RAW): 12-bit lossless compression  
JPEG: JPEG baseline-compliant  
Self-timer  
Electronically controlled timer with 220s duration  
Depth-of-field preview Lens aperture stopped down when depth-of-field preview  
button is pressed  
Monitor  
2.5˝, 210,000-dot, low-temperature polysilicon TFT LCD with  
brightness adjustment  
247  
Video output  
External interface  
Tripod socket  
Firmware  
Can be selected from NTSC and PAL  
USB 2.0  
¼˝ (ISO)  
User upgradeable  
Power source  
• One 11.1V EN-EL4 rechargeable Li-ion battery  
• EH-6 AC adapter (available separately)  
Dimensions (W×H×D) Approximately 157.5×149.5×85.5mm (6.2˝×5.9˝×3.4˝)  
Weight  
Approximately 1070g (2lb 6oz) without battery, memory  
card, body cap, or monitor cover  
Operating environment  
Temperature  
0–40°C (32104°F)  
Humidity  
Less than 85% (no condensation)  
• Unless otherwise stated, all figures are for a camera with a fully-charged battery  
operating at an ambient temperature of 20°C (68°F).  
• Nikon reserves the right to change the specifications of the hardware and software  
described in this manual at any time and without prior notice. Nikon will not be held  
liable for damages that may result from any mistakes that this manual may contain.  
248  
Battery Life  
The number of shots that can be taken with an EN-EL4 battery varies with the con-  
dition of the battery, temperature, and how the camera is used.  
Case 1  
At room temperature (20°C/68°F), approximately 2900 shots can be taken with a  
fully-charged (1900mAh) EN-EL4 battery and an AF-S VR 70–200mm f/2.8G IF ED lens  
(VR off) under the following standard Nikon test conditions: continuous high-speed  
shooting mode; continuous-servo autofocus; image quality set to JPEG Normal; image  
size set to Large; shutter speed ½50 s; shutter-release pressed halfway for three seconds  
and focus cycled from infinity to minimum range three times with each shot; after six  
shots, monitor turned on for five seconds and then turned off; cycle repeated once  
exposure meters have turned off.  
Case 2  
At room temperature (20°C/68°F), approximately 600 shots can be taken with a fully-  
charged (1900mAh) EN-EL4 battery and an AF-S VR 24–120mm f/3.5–5.6G IF ED lens  
(VR off) under the following standard Nikon test conditions: single-frame shooting  
mode; single-servo autofocus; image quality set to JPEG Normal; image size set to  
Large; shutter speed ½50 s; shutter-release pressed halfway for six seconds and focus  
cycled from infinity to minimum range once with each shot; after each shot, monitor  
turned on for two seconds and then turned off; cycle repeated once exposure meters  
have turned off.  
The following can reduce battery life:  
• Using the monitor  
• Keeping the shutter-release button pressed halfway  
• Repeated autofocus operations  
Taking NEF (RAW) or TIFF (RGB) photographs  
• Slow shutter speeds  
To ensure that you get the most from rechargeable Nikon EN-EL4 batteries:  
• Keep the battery contacts clean. Soiled contacts can reduce battery performance.  
• Use batteries immediately after charging. Batteries will lose their charge if left un-  
used.  
249  
Index  
Symbols  
CH. See Shooting mode  
E
3D color matrix metering. See CL. See Shooting mode  
Electronic analog exposure  
display, 93  
Metering  
3D Multi Sensor Balanced Fill-  
Flash for Digital SLR, 110  
Clock-calendar, 19  
Closest subject priority. See  
AF-area mode  
Electronic range finder, 83  
Exif version 2.2, 158  
Exposure bracketing, 98  
Exposure compensation, 97  
Exposure delay mode, 3, 120  
Color mode, 67, 168  
Color profile. See Color  
mode  
Color temperature. See White Exposure meters, 84. See also  
balance  
CompactFlash. See Memory  
card  
Computer, 213, 223  
Continuous shooting mode,  
70, 188  
Contrast. See Tone compen-  
sation  
CPU lenses, 20, 228–230  
Creative Lighting System, 160  
Custom Settings, 170  
defaults, 175  
A
Advanced Wireless Lighting,  
106  
AF-area mode, 76  
Aperture, 85–93  
adjusting, 90  
lock, 94  
maximum, 83, 84, 87, 107,  
109, 116  
minimum, 20, 87, 230  
non-CPU lenses and, 124  
value display, 7, 11  
Ambient light sensor, 51, 57  
Auto meter off, 187  
Autoexposure lock, 95  
Autofocus, 76  
continuous-servo, 72  
focus tracking, 73  
single-area AF, 72  
single-servo, 72  
Auto meter off  
Exposure mode, 85–93  
aperture-priority auto,  
90–91  
manual, 92–93  
programmed auto, 86–87  
shutter-priority auto, 88–89  
F
FINE. See Image quality  
Flash, 106–107. See also  
Speedlight  
bracketing, 98  
Flash Color Information Com-  
munication, 107  
Flash-ready indicator, 117  
Flash sync mode, 113  
Flexible program, 87. See  
also Exposure mode, pro-  
grammed auto  
Focal plane mark, 3, 83  
Focus. See autofocus; focus  
mode; manual focus  
Focus area (focus brackets),  
10, 74–79  
menu banks, 173  
CSM. See Custom Settings;  
CSM menu  
CSM menu, 170–205  
Auto FP high-speed sync,  
107, 194  
D
Date, 19, 209  
Delete, 148, 149  
Deleting, 35, 130, 148–149.  
See also Memory card,  
formatting  
B
Backlight, control panel, 3  
BASIC. See Image quality  
Battery,  
all images, 149  
inserting, 17  
playback menu, 148  
selected images, 149  
single-frame playback, 35,  
130  
Depth-of-field preview, 85  
Digital Print Order Format,  
156  
Diopter, 31, 232  
DPOF. See Digital Print Order  
Format  
life, 249  
storage, v  
Focus lock, 80–81  
Focus mode, 72–73  
Focusing screen, 232  
Folders, 150, 165, 191  
Format, 207. See also Mem-  
ory card, formatting  
FV lock, 108, 201  
Blur, reducing, 33, 48–50,  
106. See also Exposure  
delay mode; Mirror-up mode  
208, 240  
Bulb. See long time exposures  
Bracketing, 98–105. See also  
Exposure bracketing; White  
balance, bracketing  
Brightness. See LCD Brightness  
G
Group dynamic-AF. See AF-  
area mode  
D-TTL flash control, 110  
C
C. See Autofocus, continu-  
ous-servo  
250  
H
Metering, 84  
Setup menu, 206–219  
Shutter speed, 85–93  
and flash synchronization,  
113, 194  
Shooting menu, 161–169  
banks, 162–163  
Shooting mode, 70–71  
Single-frame. See Shooting  
mode  
Single-frame playback, 19,  
130–131  
Size. See Image size  
Slide show, 151–153  
Speedlight, 106–117, 194,  
195, 233–234. See also flash  
sRGB. See Color mode  
Standard TTL Flash for Digital  
SLR, 110  
Hide image, 154  
Highlight display, 133, 159  
Histogram, 133, 159  
Hue adjustment, 69, 169  
3D color matrix, 84  
center-weighted, 84  
color matrix, 84  
spot, 84  
Microdrive. See memory card  
Mirror up. See Shooting  
mode  
Monitor, 5, 35  
auto off, 187  
I
Illuminator. See Backlight,  
control panel  
Image dust off, 214  
Image files, 42, 46–47, 191  
Image size, 44–45  
Image quality, 41–44  
Image review, 159  
Image sharpening, 65, 168  
ISO, 168. See also Sensitivity  
ISO auto, 182  
cover, 16  
Monitor pre-flashes, 108  
Multi Sensor Balanced Fill-  
Flash for Digital SLR, 110  
M-UP. See Shooting mode  
N
i-TTL flash control, 109  
NEF, 41–44  
Nikon Capture 4, 211, 221  
Noise, 48, 85, 92  
reduction, 190  
J
T
JPEG, 41–42  
Television, 222  
L
NORMAL. See Image quality TIFF-RGB. See Image quality  
L. See Image size  
Language, 18, 209  
LCD brightness, 208  
Lens, 20–21, 228–230  
attaching, 20  
compatible, 228  
CPU, 228, 229  
non-CPU, 228–229  
type D, 20, 230  
Time. See Date  
Time exposures. See Long  
time-exposures  
Thumbnail playback, 134–135  
Tone compensation, 67, 168  
Two-button reset, 128  
P
Picture Transfer Protocol. See  
PTP.  
Photo information, 132–133  
Playback, 19, 129  
Playback menu, 148–160  
PRE. See White balance,  
preset  
Predictive focus tracking, 73  
Print set, 156–158  
Protecting images, 137  
PTP, 213, 223  
U
USB, 213, 223. See also  
computer  
type G, 20, 230  
Long time-exposures, 92  
Low-pass filter, iv, 240  
V
Video device, 167  
VIDEO OUT, 145, 222  
Video output, 209  
Viewfinder, 5, 31  
focus. See diopter  
M
R
M. See Exposure mode,  
manual; Manual focus; Im-  
age size  
RAW, 41–44, 46–47, 218.  
See also Image quality; NEF  
Red-eye reduction, 113–116  
Manual focus, 83  
W
Mass storage, 213, 223  
Memory buffer, 46–47, 70–71  
Memory card, 22–24  
approved, 236  
capacity of, 46–47  
formatting, 23, 207  
S
White balance, 51–64  
bracketing, 103–105  
color temperature, 56  
fine-tuning, 54–55  
preset, 57–64  
S. See Autofocus, single-ser-  
vo; Exposure mode, shutter-  
priority auto; Shooting mode  
Self-portraits. See Self-timer  
Self-timer, 70, 123  
Sensitivity, 48–50. See also  
ISO  
Sequential file numbering, 191  
251  
No reproduction in any form of this manual, in  
whole or in part (except for brief quotation in critical  
articles or reviews), may be made without written  
authorization from NIKON CORPORATION.  
Printed in Japan  
SB4G00850601(11)  
6MBA0511-B  

Philips SJM2002 User Manual
Philips BDP3310 User Manual
Philips AQ 6350 User Manual
Panasonic NV RX1A User Manual
Motorola H720 User Manual
Lanzar Car Audio Car Stereo System SD82 User Manual
KitchenAid 4KFP720WH0 User Manual
Kenwood Car Stereo System DPX U5130 User Manual
JVC LYT0002 0S4A User Manual
JVC KD LH917 User Manual